1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/attic/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
31 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
33 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
34 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
36 % for customized page headers/footers
37 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
39 % change header rule width
40 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
42 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
43 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
44 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
46 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
48 % the following added in Bahasa Indonesia Version
49 % to follow the most common style (centered chapters) in Indonesia
50 \addtokomafont{chapterentry}{\centering}
51 \addtokomafont{chapter}{\centering}
53 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
54 \use_default_options false
59 \maintain_unincluded_children false
61 \language_package default
64 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
65 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
66 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
67 \font_math "auto" "auto"
68 \font_default_family default
69 \use_non_tex_fonts false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format pdf2
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command default
84 \pdf_title "Petunjuk Penggunaan LyX"
89 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
90 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
91 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
96 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
97 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
100 \use_package amsmath 1
101 \use_package amssymb 1
102 \use_package cancel 1
104 \use_package mathdots 1
105 \use_package mathtools 1
106 \use_package mhchem 1
107 \use_package stackrel 1
108 \use_package stmaryrd 1
109 \use_package undertilde 1
111 \cite_engine_type default
115 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
140 \math_numbering_side default
141 \quotes_style english
145 \paperpagestyle default
146 \tracking_changes false
147 \output_changes false
156 Petunjuk Penggunaan \SpecialChar LyX
161 oleh Tim \SpecialChar LyX
166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
168 Petunjuk dalam Bahasa Indonesia ini disunting oleh
173 Apabila anda mempunyai komentar atau menemukan kesalahan yang perlu dikoreksi,
174 silakan kirim komentar ke mailing list \SpecialChar LyX
178 \begin_inset CommandInset href
180 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
199 \begin_inset Newline newline
203 \begin_inset Note Note
206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
207 Versi PDF terkini dapat diperoleh disini:
208 \begin_inset Newline newline
213 https://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
214 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
222 \begin_layout Standard
223 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
224 LatexCommand tableofcontents
231 \begin_layout Chapter
235 \begin_layout Section
236 Apakah \SpecialChar LyX
240 \begin_layout Standard
242 adalah suatu sistem pengaturan dokumen yang digunakan untuk menyiapkan
243 manuskrip makalah, buku, surat bisnis, proposal, juga dapat digunakan untuk
247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
256 menggunakan paradigma bahasa perubahan sebagai inti dari gaya penyuntingan,
257 yaitu apabila anda menulis judul bab, maka anda hanya perlu menandainya
259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
266 , tidak perlu menyatakan
267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
270 Huruf Tebal, ukuran 17
271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
274 pt, rata kiri, jarak ke baris berikutnya 5
275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
284 yang akan mengatur semuanya itu.
285 Anda hanya perlu memikirkan tentang isi dan konsep, bukan bagaimana pengaturan
289 \begin_layout Standard
290 Filosopi ini dijelaskan pada buku panduan
291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
303 Apabila belum membacanya, sangat disarankan anda membacanya terlebih dahulu
304 sebelum melanjutkan mempelajari buku panduan ini.
307 \begin_layout Standard
309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
320 , selain menjelaskan tentang filosofi \SpecialChar LyX
321 , juga menjelaskan tentang format
322 penulisan yang digunakan di semua buku panduan.
323 Oleh karena itu anda perlu meluangkan waktu untuk membacanya terlebih dahulu.
324 Buku panduan lain yang disarankan dipelajari sebelum membaca buku panduan
325 ini adalah buku panduan
326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
340 \begin_layout Section
341 Bagaimana Tampilan \SpecialChar LyX
345 \begin_layout Standard
346 Seperti umumnya aplikasi program lain, \SpecialChar LyX
347 mempunyai kotak menu utama di bagian
349 Dibagian bawahnya ada kotak bantuan yang berisi satu kotak pilihan serta
350 berbagai tombol bantuan.
351 Selain itu, ada gulungan vertikal dan area kerja utama untuk menyunting
355 \begin_layout Standard
356 Ada satu hal yang perlu anda ketahui, anda tidak akan menemukan gulungan
358 Hal ini bukanlah karena kutu program atau fitur yang terlupakan, tetapi
359 merupakan kesengajaan.
360 Teks yang ditulis dalam area kerja \SpecialChar LyX
361 akan selalu diteruskan di baris bawahnya
362 apabila melewati batas jendela kerja.
363 Oleh karena itu, \SpecialChar LyX
364 tidak memerlukan gulungan horisontal, cukup menggunakan
366 Mungkin ada tiga alasan mengapa anda masih memerlukan gulungan horisontal.
367 Yang pertama adalah apabila anda mempunyai gambar yang berukuran besar.
368 Untuk mengatasi hal ini, yang anda perlu lakukan adalah mengatur skala
369 gambar di \SpecialChar LyX
370 agar bisa ditampilan seluruhnya di area kerja \SpecialChar LyX
372 Alasan yang kedua dan ketiga adalah berkaitan dengan tabel dan persamaan
373 yang melebihi area kerja.
374 Untuk tabel, anda bisa menggunakan tombol panah untuk menggeser kursor
375 dalam tabel pada arah horisontal.
376 Namun demikian, hal ini belum dapat dilakukan untuk persamaan yang panjang
377 dan melebihi area kerja.
380 \begin_layout Standard
381 Penjelasan ringkas tentang semua menu \SpecialChar LyX
382 serta tombol bantuan yang ada, silahkan
388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
390 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
395 Hampir semua menu dapat dipahami dengan sendirinya dari nama menu.
396 Namun demikian anda dapat memperoleh penjelasan lanjut pada sub-bab dalam
402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
404 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
412 \begin_layout Section
416 \begin_layout Standard
417 Bantuan yang disediakan adalah dalam bentuk buku panduan \SpecialChar LyX
423 buku panduan dalam \SpecialChar LyX
425 Caranya sangat mudah, dari menu
429 , kemudian pilihlah buku panduan yang ingin anda baca.
432 \begin_layout Section
433 Pengaturan \SpecialChar LyX
435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
437 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
444 \begin_layout Standard
445 Ada beberapa fitur \SpecialChar LyX
446 dapat diatur dari dalam \SpecialChar LyX
447 , tanpa melakukan perubahan
448 atau menyunting secara langsung pada berkas konfigurasinya.
450 mampu memeriksa sistem anda untuk melihat perangkat lunak, class dokumen
452 , serta paket \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 Dengan kemampuan ini, \SpecialChar LyX
455 menggunakannya untuk menentukan pengaturan bawaan
461 \begin_inset Index idx
464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
471 Walaupun pengaturan konfigurasi bawaan sudah dilakukan ketika proses instalasi
473 , anda masih mempunyai keleluasaan untuk menambah program tambahan secara
474 lokal, misalnya \SpecialChar LaTeX
475 class, yang sebelumnya belum dikenal oleh \SpecialChar LyX
477 Untuk memaksa \SpecialChar LyX
478 untuk memeriksa ulang sistem anda, maka anda perlu menggunakan
481 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
485 \begin_inset Index idx
488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
489 Konfigurasi Ulang \SpecialChar LyX
496 Setelah proses konfigurasi ulang, anda harus menjalankan ulang \SpecialChar LyX
498 n semua perubahan diterapkan dalam \SpecialChar LyX
502 \begin_layout Section
503 Pengaturan \SpecialChar LaTeX
505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
507 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
514 \begin_layout Standard
515 Anda dapat menyunting dokumen dalam \SpecialChar LyX
516 tanpa instalasi \SpecialChar LaTeX
517 , namun demikian anda
518 tidak akan bisa melihat atau mebuat PDF atau mencetak dokumen tanpa \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 Apabila dokumen anda menggunakan DocBook, maka anda akan dapat menghasilkan
521 PDF atau yang setara, selain itu semua dokumen dalam DocBook akan mempunyai
522 keluaran sebagai plain text atau XHTML.
525 \begin_layout Standard
526 Beberapa class dokumen menggunakan kombinasi class \SpecialChar LaTeX
527 atau DocBook atau paket
530 Anda dapat menggunakan class dokumen tersebut walaupun anda tidak memiliki
531 berkas yang seharusnya sudah dipasang.
532 Tentu saja anda tidak dapat melihat hasil keluaran tanpa semua berkas terpasang
536 \begin_layout Standard
537 Semua paket \SpecialChar LaTeX
538 yang sudah dideteksi ada dalam sistem anda dapat dilihat melalui
541 Bantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
560 Apabila ada paket-paket yang belum terpasang, anda perlu melakukan instalasi
561 paket kemudian konfigurasi ulang (menu
563 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
571 \begin_inset Note Note
574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
575 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
576 Code box prevent that the term
577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
585 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
586 More about \SpecialChar TeX
587 Code is described in section
592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
594 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
598 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
599 is explained in section
604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
606 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
616 \begin_inset Index idx
619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
620 Konfigurasi Ulang \SpecialChar LyX
626 Informasi tentang bagaimana melakukan instalasi tambahan paket \SpecialChar LaTeX
628 lihat sub-bab 5.1 dari buku panduan
630 Perubahan dan Pengaturan
635 \begin_layout Chapter
636 Bagaimana Menggunakan \SpecialChar LyX
640 \begin_layout Section
641 Dasar Penggunaan Berkas
642 \begin_inset Index idx
645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
654 \begin_layout Standard
655 Semua penggunaan berkas dapat dimulai dari menu
659 serta ada di kotak bantuan dalam bentuk ikon tombol bantuan.
660 Beberapa menu yang berkaitan dengan berkas adalah:
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 \begin_layout Itemize
689 \begin_layout Itemize
705 \begin_layout Itemize
711 \begin_layout Itemize
723 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \begin_layout Itemize
751 \begin_layout Itemize
761 \begin_layout Itemize
767 \begin_layout Itemize
773 \begin_layout Itemize
779 \begin_layout Standard
780 Secara umum, hampir semua operasi berkas mirip dengan yang ada di pengolah
782 Hanya saja di \SpecialChar LyX
783 ada sedikit perbedaan.
784 Apabila membuka berkas baru dari The
786 Berkas\SpecialChar menuseparator
788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
797 bukan hanya menuntun anda untuk memberi nama berkas tetapi juga memilih
798 templet yang akan anda gunakan.
799 Dengan memilih templet secara otomatis akan mengatur fitur utama tataletak
800 dokumen, sedangkan fitur lainnya dapat anda atur sendiri.
801 Templet mungkin menggunakan kelas dokumen tertentu (lihat subbab
806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
808 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
815 \begin_layout Standard
832 sangat berguna apabila anda bersama teman-teman anda menyunting berkas
837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
838 Apabila anda akan melakukan hal ini, anda perlu mempelajari fitur Kontrol
839 Versi yang ditulis di buku panduan
843 \SpecialChar endofsentence
858 akan memuat ulang dokumen dari cakra.
859 Anda dapat menggunakan operasi
867 untuk mengabaikan perubahan yang sudah anda lakukan dan mengembalikan ke
868 berkas terakhir yang anda simpan.
869 Dengan operasi berkas
877 anda dapat mendaftarkan catatan perubahan pada dokumen sehingga orang lain
878 akan dapat mengenali perubahan yang telah anda lakukan.
881 \begin_layout Section
882 Dasar Fitur Penyuntingan
883 \begin_inset Index idx
886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
895 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
902 \begin_layout Standard
903 Seperti pengolah kata modern lainnya, operasi penyuntingan dengan potong
904 dan tempel dalam \SpecialChar LyX
905 dapat dipraktekkan untuk teks, berupa karakter, kata,
906 maupun keseluruhan halaman atau bahkan lebih dari satu halaman.
907 Pada empat subbab berikut akan menjelaskan fitur penyuntingan yang ada
908 dalam \SpecialChar LyX
909 dan bagaimana memanfaatkannya.
910 Kita akan memulai dari potong dan tempel.
913 \begin_layout Standard
914 Seperti yang anda perkirakan, menu
918 dan kotak bantuan standar menyediakan perintah potong dan tempelkan serta
919 fitur suntingan lainnya.
920 Beberapa perintah suntingan perlu pembahasan khusus sehingga dikelompokkan
921 dalam pembahasan subbab berikutnya.
922 Perintah suntingan utama adalah:
925 \begin_layout Itemize
939 \begin_layout Itemize
953 \begin_layout Itemize
967 \begin_layout Itemize
971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
981 \begin_layout Itemize
985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
991 \begin_layout Itemize
995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1007 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1013 \begin_layout Standard
1014 Tiga perintah suntingan yang pertama dapat dipahami dari nama perintahnya
1016 Hanya ada beberapa catatan: apabila anda memilih dan menandai teks di dokumen
1017 anda, maka secara otomatis akan tersimpam di papan klip.
1026 juga berfungsi sebagai perintah
1031 Selain itu yang paling penting, jika anda memilih dan menandai teks, harap
1032 hati-hati: jika anda menekan salah satu tombol, maka \SpecialChar LyX
1034 yang anda pilih tadi dan mengganti dengan dengan huruf atau karakter yang
1036 Untuk mengembalikannya, anda perlu melakukan perintah
1040 agar teks dikembalikan seperti semula.
1043 \begin_layout Standard
1044 \begin_inset Index idx
1047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1053 Anda dapat dapat menyalin teks di \SpecialChar LyX
1054 juga dari program lainnya menggunakan
1073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1088 akan menampilkan daftar teks yang terakhir anda tempelkan.
1091 \begin_layout Standard
1094 \SpecialChar menuseparator
1096 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1109 akan menyisipkan teks yang tersimpan di papan klip sedemikian sehingga teks
1110 yang disisipkan dalam
1115 Paragraf baru akan dimulai apabila ada baris kosong.
1120 , teks disisipkan sebagai paragraf baru, dimana setiap ganti baris menjadi
1124 \begin_layout Standard
1125 \begin_inset Index idx
1128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1135 \begin_inset Index idx
1138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1146 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1165 akan membuka jendela dialog
1168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1178 Apabila anda sudah menemukan kata atau ekspresi yang anda cari, \SpecialChar LyX
1181 Dengan menekan tombol
1185 , kata yang ditemukan tadi akan digantikan dengan teks yang ada di area
1191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1199 Anda bisa meneruskan pencarian dengan menekan tombol Berikutnya.
1200 Jika anda menekan tombol
1205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1212 maka semua kata yang ada di dokumen akan diganti seketika secara otomatis.
1216 \begin_layout Standard
1217 Apabila anda ingin mempertimbangkan huruf besar/kecil, anda perlu menggunakan
1220 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1260 anda bisa mengatur pencarian yang anda inginkan.
1261 Apabila anda mengkatifkan pilihan
1264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1273 , maka pencarian kata
1274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1306 akan memaksa \SpecialChar LyX
1307 hanya mencari kata tersebut, misalnya pencarian
1308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1319 tidak akan menemukan
1320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 offers also an advanced
1338 \begin_inset space ~
1342 \begin_inset space ~
1347 feature that is described in sec.
1348 \begin_inset space ~
1352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1354 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1361 \begin_layout Standard
1362 Beberapa sisipan tambahan berformat, seperti nota, ambangan, dll., dapat
1364 Maknanya apabila tanda sisipan dihilangkan, maka isinya akan berubah menjadi
1366 Cara menguraikan sisipan tambahan adalah dengan meletakkan kursor di lokasi
1367 paling depan dalam kotak sisipan kemudian menekan tombol ketik
1371 atau meletakkan kursor di bagian akhir dalam kotak sisipan kemudian menekan
1379 \begin_layout Standard
1382 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1385 arg "inset-select-all"
1391 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1394 selects the whole document.
1397 \begin_layout Section
1398 Batalkan dan Kembalikan
1399 \begin_inset Index idx
1402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1409 \begin_inset Index idx
1412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1421 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1428 \begin_layout Standard
1429 Jika anda membuat kesalahan anda dapat dengan mudah membatalkannya.
1430 Anda perlu ke menu Suntingan
1432 \SpecialChar menuseparator
1435 atau dari tombol bantuan
1445 untuk membatalkan apa yang baru saja anda lakukan.
1447 mempunyai kemampunyan menyimpan dalam kapasitas yang besar untuk membatalkan/m
1449 Saat ini mekanisme simpanan maksimum adalah sampai 100
1450 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1454 Apabila secara tidak sengaja anda melakukan proses pembatalan yang terlebih,
1455 anda bisa mengembalikannya dari menu
1457 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1460 atau dengan menekan tombol
1469 \begin_layout Standard
1470 Apabila anda mengembalikan perubahan sampai ke kondisi dokumen saat terakhir
1471 disimpan, status dokumen
1472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1479 tidak akan menjadi normal kembali seperti tidak ada perubahan.
1480 Hal ini karena anda sebenarnya melakukan perubahan pada dokumen.
1483 \begin_layout Standard
1492 dapat dilakukan untuk apa saja di \SpecialChar LyX
1494 Namun demikian proses
1502 pada teks tidak dilakukan untuk setiap karakter, tetapi berlaku untuk kumpulan
1506 \begin_layout Section
1508 \begin_inset Index idx
1511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1520 \begin_layout Standard
1521 Berikut ini adalah dasar pengunaan tetikus.
1524 \begin_layout Enumerate
1526 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
1533 \begin_layout Itemize
1538 sekali di daerah jendela kerja \SpecialChar LyX
1540 Kursor akan mengikuti dan berkedip tepat di tempat anda menekan tombol
1545 \begin_layout Enumerate
1546 Memilih dan Menandai Teks
1547 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
1554 \begin_layout Itemize
1559 kemudian seret tetikus.
1561 akan menandai teks mulai dari awal kursor sebelum diseret sampai ke tempat
1562 posisi kursor setelah diseret.
1565 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1568 untuk membuat salinan teks dalam simpanan \SpecialChar LyX
1572 \begin_layout Itemize
1573 Pindahkan kursor ke tempat lain kemudian tempelkan teks yang disimpan ke
1574 lokasi baru, menggunakan
1576 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1583 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 Sisipan Tambahan (Catatan kaki, Nota, Ambangan, etc.)
1585 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
1592 \begin_layout Standard
1597 pada sisipan tambahan untuk melihat propertinya.
1598 Anda perlu membaca pada bab tertentu di buku panduan ini untuk penjelasan
1603 \begin_layout Section
1605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1607 name "sec:Navigating"
1612 \begin_inset Index idx
1615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1624 \begin_layout Standard
1628 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1631 \begin_layout Itemize
1638 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1639 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1642 \begin_layout Itemize
1645 The `Outline', which is accessed either by the menu
1647 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
1650 or by the toolbar button
1653 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1659 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1664 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1667 and use the same menu to return to them.
1668 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1671 \begin_layout Standard
1677 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1682 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1683 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1686 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1687 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1688 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1689 your last editing position.
1692 \begin_layout Subsection
1698 \begin_layout Standard
1701 The Outline was known in earlier versions of \SpecialChar LyX
1703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1710 , since its original purpose was to display the document's table of contents.
1711 The Outline has become much more powerful now, however.
1712 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1713 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1714 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1717 LatexCommand formatted
1718 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1722 ), or notes, or citations (see
1723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1724 LatexCommand formatted
1725 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1730 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1732 The Outline has become much more powerful now, however.
1733 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1734 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1735 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1738 LatexCommand formatted
1739 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1743 ), or notes, or of citations (see
1744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1745 LatexCommand formatted
1746 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1751 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1755 \begin_layout Standard
1758 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline will in many cases open a context
1759 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1760 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1761 dialog and to modify the citation.
1762 Right-clicking a change will allow you to accept or reject it.
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1769 The `Filter' field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1771 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1772 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1780 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1783 \begin_layout Standard
1786 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1787 you further to control the display.
1792 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1793 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1798 option keeps it in the current view state.
1799 Keeping means that when you have e.
1800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1804 \begin_inset space \space{}
1807 the subsections of section
1808 \begin_inset space ~
1811 2 and 4 shown and click on section
1812 \begin_inset space ~
1815 3, the subsections of section
1816 \begin_inset space ~
1819 2 and 4 will still be shown.
1824 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1825 \begin_inset space ~
1829 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1839 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1842 \begin_layout Standard
1851 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1852 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1866 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1867 So, for example, you can move section
1868 \begin_inset space ~
1872 \begin_inset space ~
1875 2.4 or after section
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1881 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1894 (or the corresponding key bindings
1902 ) you can change the level of sections.
1903 So you can for example make section
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1912 \begin_inset space ~
1918 \begin_layout Section
1919 Masukan / Melengkapi Kata
1920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1922 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1927 \begin_inset Index idx
1930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1937 \begin_inset Index idx
1940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1973 menyediakan data kata-kata untuk mempercepat proses penyuntingan dari hasil
1974 memindai kata-kata dalam dokumen yang sedang dibuka.
1975 Semua kata-kata yang ada dalam dokumen disimpan dalam basis data untuk
1976 digunakan melengkapi kata saat proses penyuntingan.
1979 \begin_layout Standard
1980 Pengaturan bawaan \SpecialChar LyX
1981 untuk melengkapi kata adalah dalam bentuk yang paling
1982 sederhana yaitu menggunakan tampilan kursor segitiga sebagai tanda bahwa
1983 sudah ada kata tersedia.
1984 Anda tinggal menggunakan tombol
1988 untuk melengkapi kata.
1989 Apabila ada beberapa pilihan kata tersedia, jendela kecil akan muncul dan
1990 menampilkan kata-kata tersebut.
1991 Anda dapat memilih dengan menggunakan tetikus atau tombol panah, kemudian
1992 menetapkan pilihan dengan menekan tombol
2000 \begin_layout Standard
2001 Untuk menghilangkan tanda melengkapi segitiga, anda perlu mengubah pengaturan
2004 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
2007 kemudian dari seksi Penyuntingan
2009 \SpecialChar menuseparator
2011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2016 anda perlu melepaskan pilihan
2021 Sedangkan pengaturan
2023 Melengkapi kata otomatis pada baris
2025 , pilihan kata akan ditampilkan pada baris dibelakang posisi kursor.
2026 Untuk menerima saran kata yang muncul pada baris, anda cukup menekan tombol
2032 Apabila menggunakan pengaturan
2034 Menampilkan jendela pilihan otomatis
2036 , maka jendela pilihan kata akan selalu ditampilkan.
2038 mempunyai berbagai pengaturan melengkapi kata untuk yang sudah mahir.
2039 Pengaturan lanjut akan dapat ditemui di subbab.
2040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2046 reference "subsec:Input-Completion-Appendix"
2053 \begin_layout Section
2054 Gabungan tombol ketik
2055 \begin_inset Index idx
2058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2059 Gabungan tombol ketik
2065 \begin_inset Index idx
2068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 Gabungan tombol ketik
2084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2097 \begin_inset Index idx
2100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2131 \begin_layout Standard
2132 Ada dua peta utama untuk gabungan tombol ketik: CUA dan Emacs.
2133 Bawaan \SpecialChar LyX
2137 \begin_layout Standard
2138 Beberapa tombol ketik, seperti
2141 \begin_inset space ~
2149 \begin_inset space ~
2170 , sudah dapat berfungsi seperti yang anda harapkan.
2171 Namun demikian beberapa tombol ketik mungkin perlu dipahami fungsinya.
2174 \begin_layout Labeling
2175 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2179 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2180 LatexCommand nomenclature
2182 description "Tombol ketik Tabulator"
2189 LyC tidak memfungsikan tombol ini sebagai hentian tab.
2190 Apabila anda belum memahaminya anda silahkan sekarang membaca terlebih
2192 \begin_inset space ~
2196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2198 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2205 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2210 \begin_inset space ~
2214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2216 reference "subsec:Lists"
2222 Apabila anda masih merasa belum mengerti juga, mungkin anda perlu membaca
2230 \begin_layout Labeling
2231 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2235 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2236 LatexCommand nomenclature
2238 description "Tombol ketik Escape"
2245 Tombol ini digunakan sebagai
2246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2253 Secara umum tombol ini memang digunakan untuk membatalkan penyuntingan.
2254 Buku petunjuk ini juga akan membahas lebih terperinci tentang pemanfaatannya.
2257 \begin_layout Labeling
2258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2264 \begin_inset space ~
2268 \begin_inset space ~
2279 akan memindahkan kursor ke bagian awal dari baris dan tombol
2283 memindah kursor ke bagian akhir baris.
2284 Jika anda menggunakan peta Emacs,
2288 memindah ke bagian awal berkas sementara
2292 memindah kursor ke bagian akhir berkas.
2295 \begin_layout Standard
2296 Ada tiga tombol ketik pengubah:
2299 \begin_layout Labeling
2300 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2305 (Diseluruh buku petunjuk Disingkat dengan
2306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2318 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2319 LatexCommand nomenclature
2321 description "Tombol ketik Control"
2326 ) Tombol ini mempunyai beberapa fungsi, tergantung dengan tombol ketik lain
2327 yang dikombinasikan:
2328 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
2335 \begin_layout Itemize
2344 , akan menghapus seluruh kata bukan hanya satu karakter.
2347 \begin_layout Itemize
2356 , akan menggerakkan kursor satu kata kekiri atau kekanan.
2359 \begin_layout Itemize
2368 , akan memindah kursor ke bagian awal dokumen atau ke bagian akhir dokumen.
2372 \begin_layout Labeling
2373 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2378 (Dalam buku petunjuk disebut dengan
2379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2391 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2392 LatexCommand nomenclature
2394 description "Tombol ketik Shift"
2399 ) Tombol ini digunakan untuk menandai teks dengan tombol panah, dimulai
2400 dari posisi awal ke sampai berhenti menggerakkan.
2403 \begin_layout Labeling
2404 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2409 (Dalam buku petunjuk disebut dengan
2410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2422 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2423 LatexCommand nomenclature
2425 description "Tombol ketik Alt atau tombol ketik Meta"
2430 ) Sebagian besar papan ketik mempunyai tombol Alt, hanya beberapa papan
2431 ketik yang menggunakan tombol Meta.
2432 Jika anda memiliki keduanya, anda harus mencoba untuk memastikan tombol
2433 yang benar-benar aktif sebagai
2438 Tombol ini memiliki berbagai kegunaan selain berfungsi sebagai tombol
2443 Apabila anda menggunakan dengan kombinasi huruf dibawah menu, berarti and
2444 memilih menu tersebut.
2445 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
2452 \begin_layout Standard
2453 Misalnya, urutan menekan tombol
2454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2460 \begin_inset space ~
2464 \begin_inset space ~
2470 \begin_inset space ~
2474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2477 akan membawa anda ke dialog
2478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2493 \begin_inset space ~
2499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2509 \begin_layout Standard
2514 memberikan daftar berbagai kombinasi perintah yang dinyatakan dengan tombol
2523 \begin_layout Standard
2524 Anda akan banyak menemukan berbagai gabungan tombol ketik serta pintasan
2525 yang digunakan di \SpecialChar LyX
2526 , karena setiap perintah gabungan akan menampilkan aksi
2527 yang anda lakukan serta pilihan gabungan tombol ketik lain yang bisa anda
2528 pilih di jendela status bawah.
2529 Notasi gabungan tombol ketik yang muncul akan mirip dengan yang digunakan
2530 di buku petunjuk, sehingga tidak membingungkan anda.
2531 Namun demikian untuk tombol Shift akan dinyatakan secara eksplisit, sehingga
2533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2548 diikuti dengan menulis huruf besar
2555 \begin_layout Standard
2556 Anda bisa melihat berbagai perintah gabungan melalui menu
2558 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
2563 Penyuntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
2565 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2570 seperti dijelaskan di subbab
2571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2577 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2584 \begin_layout Chapter
2587 \begin_inset Index idx
2590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2600 \begin_layout Section
2602 \begin_inset Index idx
2605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2614 \begin_layout Subsection
2618 \begin_layout Standard
2619 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2620 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2621 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2622 numbering schemes, and so on.
2623 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2624 and format the title of your document differently.
2627 \begin_layout Standard
2632 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2633 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2634 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2635 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2636 picks one for you by default.
2637 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2640 \begin_layout Standard
2641 Read on for info about the document classes you can choose from \SpecialChar LyX
2643 to adjust their properties.
2646 \begin_layout Subsection
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2660 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2667 \begin_layout Standard
2668 You can select a class using the
2670 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2671 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2675 \begin_inset Index idx
2678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2685 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2694 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2699 \begin_layout Description
2700 Article for basic articles
2703 \begin_layout Description
2704 Report for basic reports
2707 \begin_layout Description
2708 Book for writing a book
2711 \begin_layout Description
2712 Letter for US-style letters
2715 \begin_layout Standard
2716 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2717 only uses if you have installed
2718 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2719 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2720 distributions will include
2722 Here are some of the classes.
2723 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2725 Special Document Classes
2734 \begin_layout Description
2735 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2738 \begin_layout Description
2739 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2743 \begin_layout Description
2744 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2748 \begin_layout Description
2749 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2750 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2751 There are three article layouts available.
2752 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2753 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2754 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2755 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2760 sequential numbering
2761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2764 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2765 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2766 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2767 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2770 \begin_layout Description
2771 Beamer Layout for presentations
2774 \begin_layout Description
2775 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2776 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2777 document class, but a new one which is distributed
2778 with \SpecialChar LyX
2782 \begin_layout Description
2783 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2786 \begin_layout Description
2788 \begin_inset space ~
2791 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2794 \begin_layout Description
2795 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2798 \begin_layout Description
2799 Foils Used to make transparencies
2802 \begin_layout Description
2803 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2804 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2805 document class, but a new one which is distributed
2806 with \SpecialChar LyX
2810 \begin_layout Description
2811 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2812 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2819 \begin_layout Description
2820 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2823 \begin_layout Description
2824 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2825 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2826 (Is used by this document.)
2829 \begin_layout Description
2830 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2833 \begin_layout Description
2834 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2837 \begin_layout Description
2842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2849 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2850 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2852 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2856 \begin_layout Description
2857 Slides Used to make transparencies
2860 \begin_layout Description
2862 \begin_inset space ~
2865 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2866 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2869 \begin_layout Description
2870 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2873 \begin_layout Standard
2874 We won't go into any detail about how to use these different document classes
2876 You can find all the details about the non-standard classes in Chapter
2882 Here, we will settle with a list of some of the common properties of all
2883 of the document classes.
2886 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2890 \begin_layout Standard
2891 New users are sometimes puzzled by the fact that many of the document classes
2894 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2895 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2897 \begin_inset Index idx
2900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2917 Or they are surprised that, when they open e.
2918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2922 \begin_inset space ~
2929 template, they receive a warning saying that the document requires files
2930 that are not installed to produce output.
2931 So it seems that something is wrong.
2934 \begin_layout Standard
2935 But nothing is wrong.
2937 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2942 , are highly specialized.\SpecialChar LyX
2943 tries to support as many different types of documents
2944 as possible, and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
2945 with a growing number.
2946 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2947 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2948 by some document class.
2949 There are just too many of them.
2950 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2953 \begin_layout Standard
2954 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as `Unavailabl
2955 e', you need to install the appropriate package files.
2956 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2957 document class for a new file.
2959 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2964 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
2966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2973 manual for information on how to install them.
2974 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2980 \begin_layout Standard
2981 Although \SpecialChar LyX
2982 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
2983 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
2984 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
2985 class files to be used for dissertation
2986 s submitted to those universities.
2987 The \SpecialChar LyX
2988 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2990 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2993 \begin_inset space ~
3000 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3007 name "subsec:Modules"
3012 \begin_inset Index idx
3015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3024 \begin_layout Standard
3025 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3026 chosen document class.
3027 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3028 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3035 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3039 \begin_inset Index idx
3042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3049 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of the
3053 \begin_layout Standard
3054 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3055 packages that are not always installed by default.
3057 will warn you if you do not have the needed package.
3058 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3059 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3061 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3062 file without the missing package.
3063 If you want to be able to produce output, then you need to install the
3064 missing package and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3067 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3071 \begin_inset Index idx
3074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3075 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3085 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3094 manual for more information on installing needed packages.
3097 \begin_layout Standard
3098 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3106 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3108 will advise you about these things.
3116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3120 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3125 \begin_inset Index idx
3128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3129 Document ! Local Layout
3137 \begin_layout Standard
3138 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3139 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3140 : They are intended to be used in
3141 a variety of different documents, and if you often find yourself needing
3142 the same sort of thing in different documents, you should consider writing
3143 a module for this purpose.
3144 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, and you
3145 find yourself wanting a specific inset or character style, but only that
3147 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3149 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3167 manual for information on how to use it.
3170 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 Each class has a default set of options.
3176 Here's a quick table describing them:
3179 \begin_layout Standard
3180 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3186 \begin_layout Standard
3188 \begin_inset Tabular
3189 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3190 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3192 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3193 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3194 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3195 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3649 \begin_layout Standard
3650 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3656 \begin_layout Standard
3657 You're probably also wondering what
3658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3662 \begin_inset space ~
3666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3670 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3671 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3676 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3681 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3691 headings, there are also
3699 headings, and so on.
3700 We'll describe these headings fully in section
3701 \begin_inset space ~
3705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3707 reference "subsec:Headings"
3714 \begin_layout Subsection
3716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3718 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3723 \begin_inset Index idx
3726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3735 \begin_inset Index idx
3738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3747 \begin_layout Standard
3748 The most important properties of documents classes are set in the menu
3750 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3761 \begin_inset space ~
3766 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3768 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3769 doesn't support special options you want to
3770 use for your document.
3771 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3772 -class and its options, you have to read
3776 \begin_layout Standard
3783 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3794 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3795 You can choose between the following five options:
3798 \begin_layout Labeling
3799 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3804 Use default page style of current class.
3807 \begin_layout Labeling
3808 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3813 No page numbers or headings.
3816 \begin_layout Labeling
3817 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3825 \begin_layout Labeling
3826 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3831 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3832 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3833 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3834 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3837 \begin_layout Labeling
3838 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3843 This allows you to create fully customizable headers and footers if you
3844 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3850 \begin_inset Index idx
3853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3855 -packages ! fancyhdr
3861 How they are defined is explained in section
3862 \begin_inset space ~
3866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3868 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3875 \begin_layout Standard
3876 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3877 \begin_inset space ~
3881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3883 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3890 \begin_layout Subsection
3891 Paper Size and Orientation
3892 \begin_inset Index idx
3895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3896 Document ! Paper size
3902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3904 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3911 \begin_layout Standard
3912 You'll find the following options in the menu
3915 \begin_inset space ~
3922 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3928 \begin_inset Index idx
3931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3940 \begin_layout Labeling
3941 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3945 \begin_inset space ~
3950 What size paper to print on.
3954 \begin_layout Itemize
3960 \begin_layout Itemize
3970 \begin_layout Itemize
3976 \begin_layout Itemize
3982 \begin_layout Itemize
3988 \begin_layout Itemize
3994 \begin_layout Itemize
4000 \begin_layout Labeling
4001 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4006 To choose whether to output as
4017 \begin_layout Labeling
4018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4022 \begin_inset space ~
4027 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4028 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4031 \begin_layout Subsection
4033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4035 name "subsec:Margins"
4040 \begin_inset Index idx
4043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4050 \begin_inset Index idx
4053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4062 \begin_layout Standard
4063 Paper margins are set in the menu
4065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4069 \begin_inset Index idx
4072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4081 \begin_layout Standard
4082 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings.
4083 Because KOMA-Script calculates then the printspace automatically by taking
4084 the paper format and the font size into account.
4087 \begin_layout Subsection
4091 \begin_layout Standard
4092 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4098 That includes the paragraph environments.
4099 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4100 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4101 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4103 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4112 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4114 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4115 will either need to create a new style yourself or else to convert these
4116 paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
4119 \begin_layout Section
4120 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4121 \begin_inset Index idx
4124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4125 Paragraph ! Indentation
4133 \begin_layout Subsection
4135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4137 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4144 \begin_layout Standard
4145 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4146 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4149 \begin_layout Standard
4150 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4151 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4152 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4153 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4157 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4163 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4164 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4165 language than English.
4167 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the used language.
4170 \begin_layout Standard
4171 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4172 and text — in fact, all of the spacings for just about everything are pre-coded
4173 into \SpecialChar LyX
4175 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4178 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4180 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4181 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4182 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4189 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4190 goes to produce a printable file.
4195 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4197 gives you the ability to globally change
4201 of these pre-coded spacings.
4202 We'll explain more later.
4205 \begin_layout Subsection
4206 Paragraph Separation
4207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4209 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4214 \begin_inset Index idx
4217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4218 Paragraph ! Separation
4226 \begin_layout Standard
4227 To separate paragraphs, select
4238 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4249 \begin_inset Index idx
4252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4258 to indent paragraphs or add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4259 The size of the skips can be defined in the dialog, for the indentation
4260 you have to add this line to your document preamble:
4263 \begin_layout Standard
4273 \begin_layout Standard
4274 where length is a value in one of the units listed in Appendix
4275 \begin_inset space ~
4279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4281 reference "cap:Units"
4286 The default length is 30
4287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
4293 \begin_layout Subsection
4297 \begin_layout Standard
4298 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4301 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4303 \begin_inset space ~
4308 dialog and toggle the
4311 \begin_inset space ~
4316 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4319 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4323 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4324 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4328 \begin_layout Standard
4329 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4330 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4333 \begin_layout Subsection
4335 \begin_inset Index idx
4338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4339 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4347 \begin_layout Standard
4350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4354 \begin_inset Index idx
4357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4366 dialog you can set the line spacing in the submenu
4369 \begin_inset space ~
4378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4379 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4385 \begin_inset Index idx
4388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4390 -packages ! setspace
4395 installed to use this feature.
4403 \begin_layout Section
4404 Paragraph Environments
4405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4407 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4412 \begin_inset Index idx
4415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4416 Paragraph ! Environments
4422 \begin_inset Index idx
4425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4426 Paragraph environments|(
4434 \begin_layout Subsection
4438 \begin_layout Standard
4439 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4442 \begin_layout Standard
4461 \begin_inset Newline newline
4464 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4466 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4467 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4468 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4477 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4480 \begin_layout Standard
4481 A paragraph environment is simply a
4482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4489 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4490 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4491 scheme, labels, and so on.
4492 Additionally, you can
4493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4500 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4501 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4502 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4503 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hold-overs from the
4504 days of typewriters.
4505 There are several paragraph environments which are specific to a particular
4507 We'll only be covering the most common ones here.
4510 \begin_layout Standard
4511 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4512 \begin_inset Graphics
4513 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4519 at the left end of the toolbar.
4521 will change the environment of the
4525 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4526 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4527 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4531 \begin_layout Standard
4540 create a new paragraph using the
4544 paragraph environment.
4546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4553 because if you are in one of these environments:
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Itemize
4568 \begin_layout Itemize
4574 \begin_layout Itemize
4580 \begin_layout Itemize
4586 \begin_layout Itemize
4592 \begin_layout Itemize
4598 \begin_layout Standard
4600 keeps the old paragraph environment when you hit
4604 , rather than resetting it to
4610 will still reset the nesting depth, however.
4611 Usually, starting a new paragraph resets both the paragraph environment
4612 and the nesting depth (for more on nesting see section
4613 \begin_inset space ~
4617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4619 reference "sec:Nesting"
4624 At the moment, all this is context-specific; you're better off expecting
4629 to reset the paragraph environment and depth.
4630 If you want a new paragraph to keep the current environment and depth,
4634 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
4640 \begin_layout Subsection
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4645 The default paragraph environment is
4650 It creates a plain paragraph.
4652 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4653 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4654 this manual) are in the
4661 \begin_layout Standard
4662 You can nest a paragraph using the
4666 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4674 \begin_layout Subsection
4676 \begin_inset Index idx
4679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4688 \begin_layout Standard
4689 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4690 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4699 for thanks or contact information.
4700 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4701 places all of this on a separate page
4702 along with today's date.
4703 For other types of documents, the title
4704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4711 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4715 \begin_layout Standard
4717 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4731 Here's how you use them:
4734 \begin_layout Itemize
4735 Put the title of your document in the
4742 \begin_layout Itemize
4743 Put the author name in the
4750 \begin_layout Itemize
4751 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4752 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4758 Note that using this environment is optional.
4759 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4760 will automatically insert today's date.
4761 If you don't want any date, add the line
4762 \begin_inset Newline newline
4772 \begin_inset Newline newline
4775 to the preamble of your document (menu
4777 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 You can use footnotes to insert
4785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4792 or contact information.
4795 \begin_layout Subsection
4797 \begin_inset Index idx
4800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4809 name "subsec:Headings"
4816 \begin_layout Standard
4817 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4819 takes care of the numbering for you.
4822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4824 \begin_inset Index idx
4827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4828 Section headings ! Numbered
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4841 \begin_layout Enumerate
4847 \begin_layout Enumerate
4853 \begin_layout Enumerate
4859 \begin_layout Enumerate
4865 \begin_layout Enumerate
4871 \begin_layout Enumerate
4877 \begin_layout Enumerate
4883 \begin_layout Standard
4885 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4886 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4887 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4890 \begin_layout Standard
4891 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4892 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4893 You group the book into chapters.
4895 does similar grouping:
4898 \begin_layout Itemize
4903 is divided in either
4914 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 \begin_layout Itemize
4950 \begin_layout Itemize
4962 \begin_layout Itemize
4974 \begin_layout Standard
4975 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4983 Not all document types use the
4987 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4992 is the top-level heading.
5000 \begin_layout Standard
5005 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5006 labels it with its number,
5007 along with the number of the subsection, section, and, if applicable, chapter
5009 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5021 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5023 \begin_inset Index idx
5026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5027 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5035 \begin_layout Standard
5036 The unnumbered section headings have a
5037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5044 at the end of their name.
5045 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5046 the table of contents, see section
5047 \begin_inset space ~
5051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5060 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5061 Changing the Numbering
5062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5064 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5071 \begin_layout Standard
5072 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5073 in the Table of Contents.
5074 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5076 Certain classes start with
5090 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5100 This is something you can change.
5103 \begin_layout Standard
5106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5112 \begin_inset Index idx
5115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5126 \begin_inset space ~
5130 \begin_inset space ~
5135 you'll see two counters.
5140 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5141 numbers a section heading.
5142 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5146 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5147 Short Titles of Headings
5148 \begin_inset Index idx
5151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5152 Section headings ! Short titles
5158 \begin_inset Argument 1
5161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5170 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5177 \begin_layout Standard
5178 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5179 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5180 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5181 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5184 \begin_layout Standard
5186 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5187 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5188 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5189 To specify a short title, use the menu
5191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5193 \begin_inset space ~
5199 This will insert a box labeled
5200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5215 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
5216 This also works for captions inside floats.
5219 \begin_layout Standard
5220 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5223 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5227 \begin_layout Standard
5228 The following information applies to all section headings:
5231 \begin_layout Itemize
5232 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5235 \begin_layout Itemize
5236 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5239 \begin_layout Itemize
5240 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5243 \begin_layout Itemize
5244 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5247 \begin_layout Subsection
5248 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5253 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5267 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5268 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5269 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5270 the text they contain.
5271 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5279 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5283 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5292 when you start a new paragraph.
5293 So, you can type in that poem and merrily hit
5297 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5298 Of course, that means that, once you're done typing in that poem, you have
5299 to change back to the
5303 environment yourself.
5306 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5335 \begin_layout Standard
5336 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5337 time for the differences.
5346 are identical except for one difference:
5350 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5359 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5362 \begin_layout Standard
5363 Here's an example of the
5376 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5378 See – no indentation!
5382 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5383 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5384 the other paragraph.
5387 \begin_layout Standard
5388 Here's another example, this time in the
5395 \begin_layout Quotation
5401 If I keep writing, you'll see the indentation.
5402 If your country uses a writing style that shows off new paragraphs by indenting
5403 the first line, then
5407 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5411 you were quoting other text.
5414 \begin_layout Quotation
5415 Here's a new paragraph.
5416 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5417 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5420 \begin_layout Standard
5421 As the examples show,
5425 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5426 They should put quotes in the
5431 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5435 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5438 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5444 \begin_inset Index idx
5447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5456 \begin_inset Index idx
5459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5475 \begin_layout Standard
5480 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5486 \begin_inset Newline newline
5489 Which I did not rehearse!
5493 It could be much worse.
5494 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5496 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5497 indented a bit more than the first.
5498 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5504 \begin_inset Newline newline
5507 And make things look fine
5508 \begin_inset Newline newline
5514 arg "newline-insert newline"
5520 \begin_layout Standard
5525 does not indent both margins.
5526 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5527 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5534 arg "newline-insert newline"
5540 \begin_layout Subsection
5542 \begin_inset Index idx
5545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5561 \begin_layout Standard
5563 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5573 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5574 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5583 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5584 lets you provide your own label.
5585 We'll present the individual details of each type of list next after describing
5586 some general features of all four of them.
5589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5593 \begin_layout Standard
5594 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5596 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5597 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5606 reset the environment to
5610 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5611 The nesting depth is hereby kept.
5612 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5616 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5619 to break paragraphs.
5622 \begin_layout Standard
5623 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5624 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5625 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5627 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5628 you read all of section
5629 \begin_inset space ~
5633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5635 reference "sec:Nesting"
5643 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5649 \begin_inset Index idx
5652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5668 \begin_layout Standard
5669 The first type of list we'll describe in detail is the
5673 paragraph environment.
5674 It has the following properties:
5677 \begin_layout Itemize
5678 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5679 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5686 \begin_layout Itemize
5688 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5691 \begin_layout Itemize
5692 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5696 \begin_layout Itemize
5697 The items can have any length.
5699 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5700 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5707 \begin_layout Itemize
5712 environment inside another
5716 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5717 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5724 \begin_layout Itemize
5725 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5728 \begin_layout Itemize
5730 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5733 \begin_layout Itemize
5735 \begin_inset space ~
5739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5741 reference "sec:Nesting"
5745 for a full explanation of nesting.
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5759 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5762 \begin_layout Standard
5763 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5764 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5767 \begin_layout Itemize
5768 The label for the first level
5772 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5773 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5780 \begin_layout Itemize
5781 The label for the second level is a dash.
5782 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5789 \begin_layout Itemize
5790 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5791 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5798 \begin_layout Itemize
5799 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5803 \begin_layout Itemize
5804 Back out to the third level.
5808 \begin_layout Itemize
5809 Back to the second level.
5813 \begin_layout Itemize
5814 Back to the outermost level.
5817 \begin_layout Standard
5818 These are the default labels for an
5823 You can customize these labels in the
5825 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5828 dialog in the submenu
5835 \begin_inset Index idx
5838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5847 \begin_layout Standard
5848 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5849 We'll explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5851 \begin_inset space ~
5855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5857 reference "sec:Nesting"
5864 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5870 \begin_inset Index idx
5873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5882 name "sec:Enumerate"
5889 \begin_layout Standard
5894 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5895 It has these properties:
5898 \begin_layout Enumerate
5899 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5900 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5907 \begin_layout Enumerate
5908 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5912 \begin_layout Enumerate
5914 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5917 \begin_layout Enumerate
5922 environment resets the counter to one.
5925 \begin_layout Enumerate
5935 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5942 \begin_layout Enumerate
5943 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5944 Items can have any length.
5947 \begin_layout Enumerate
5948 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5951 \begin_layout Enumerate
5952 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5955 \begin_layout Enumerate
5956 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5960 \begin_layout Standard
5969 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5971 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5972 labels the four different levels in an
5979 \begin_layout Enumerate
5980 The first level of an
5984 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5985 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5992 \begin_layout Enumerate
5993 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5994 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
6001 \begin_layout Enumerate
6002 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6003 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
6010 \begin_layout Enumerate
6011 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6015 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6020 \begin_layout Enumerate
6021 Back to the third level
6025 \begin_layout Enumerate
6026 Back to the second level.
6030 \begin_layout Enumerate
6031 Back to the outermost level.
6034 \begin_layout Standard
6035 Once again, you can customize the type of numbering used in the
6040 It involves adding commands to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6046 As stated earlier, such customization only shows up in the printed version,
6047 not in \SpecialChar LyX
6051 \begin_layout Standard
6052 There is more to nesting
6056 environments than we've stated here.
6057 You should read section
6058 \begin_inset space ~
6062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6064 reference "sec:Nesting"
6068 to learn more about nesting.
6071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6077 \begin_inset Index idx
6080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6089 \begin_layout Standard
6090 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6094 list has no fixed label.
6095 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6104 of the first line as the label.
6108 \begin_layout Description
6109 Example: This is an example of the
6116 \begin_layout Standard
6118 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6122 \begin_layout Standard
6124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6131 it is meant that the first hit of the
6135 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6137 If you need to use more than one word in the label use a
6145 arg "space-insert protected"
6150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6151 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6153 \begin_inset space ~
6159 \begin_inset space ~
6163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6165 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6169 for more info.) Here is an example:
6172 \begin_layout Description
6174 \begin_inset space ~
6177 Example: This one shows how to use a
6180 \begin_inset space ~
6192 \begin_layout Description
6193 Usage: You should use the
6197 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6198 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6200 It's not a good idea to use a
6204 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6205 You're better off using
6217 paragraphs into them.
6220 \begin_layout Description
6221 Nesting: You can nest
6225 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6229 \begin_layout Standard
6230 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6231 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6232 them from the first line.
6235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6236 The \SpecialChar LyX
6242 \begin_inset Index idx
6245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6246 Lists ! \SpecialChar LyX
6255 \begin_layout Standard
6260 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6261 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6265 \begin_layout Standard
6266 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6274 When you are using a KOMA-Script document class, like in this document,
6279 environment is named
6291 \begin_layout Standard
6300 environment has user-defined labels for each list item.
6301 There are the following properties of this list environment:
6304 \begin_layout Labeling
6305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6307 \begin_inset space ~
6310 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6319 of each line as the item label.
6324 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6325 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6326 blank as described above.
6329 \begin_layout Labeling
6330 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6331 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6332 uses different margins for the item label and the
6333 body of the item text.
6334 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6335 label width plus a little extra space.
6339 \begin_layout Labeling
6340 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6342 \begin_inset space ~
6345 width \SpecialChar LyX
6346 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6347 If the label width is larger, the label
6348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6355 into the first line.
6356 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6357 margin of the rest of the item text.
6360 \begin_layout Labeling
6361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6363 \begin_inset space ~
6366 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6371 environment have the same left margin.
6372 \begin_inset Newline newline
6375 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6378 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6380 \begin_inset space ~
6389 \begin_inset space ~
6394 determines the default label width.
6395 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6404 multiple times instead.
6405 The M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6415 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6418 \begin_inset space ~
6423 every time you alter a label in a
6428 \begin_inset Newline newline
6431 The predefined default width is the length of
6432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6441 \begin_inset Newline newline
6445 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6453 Setting the cursor into a list item to change only its label width will
6454 only change the width inside \SpecialChar LyX
6455 but not in the output.
6463 \begin_layout Standard
6468 environment the same way like the
6472 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6478 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6482 \begin_layout Standard
6487 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6489 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6491 \begin_inset space ~
6495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6497 reference "sec:Nesting"
6501 to learn about nesting.
6504 \begin_layout Standard
6505 There is yet another feature of the
6509 environment: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6510 left-justifies the item labels
6512 You can use additional
6516 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6517 justifies the item label.
6522 are documented in section
6523 \begin_inset space ~
6527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6529 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6534 Here are some examples:
6535 \begin_inset Newpage pagebreak
6541 \begin_layout Labeling
6542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6543 Left The default for
6550 \begin_layout Labeling
6551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6552 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6559 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6562 \begin_layout Labeling
6563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6564 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6568 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6575 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6578 \begin_layout Subsection
6580 \begin_inset Index idx
6583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6592 \begin_layout Standard
6593 To use the features described in this section, you must load the module
6596 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6598 in the document settings.
6599 This loads the features of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6605 \begin_inset Index idx
6608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6610 -packages ! enumitem
6618 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6619 Custom Enumerate Lists
6620 \begin_inset Index idx
6623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6624 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6632 \begin_layout Standard
6634 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6637 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6640 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6641 There you add the command
6644 \begin_layout Standard
6652 \begin_layout Standard
6664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6665 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6666 Code, look at section
6667 \begin_inset space ~
6671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6673 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6686 is hereby the counter of the enumeration in the first level.
6693 outputs the counter as small Roman numeral.
6694 For capital Roman numerals replace in the command above
6707 For Arabic numerals use
6715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6722 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6737 \begin_layout Standard
6739 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6747 You can only number 26
6748 \begin_inset space ~
6751 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6759 \begin_layout Standard
6760 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6761 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6764 \begin_layout Standard
6765 As example a list with custom numbering:
6768 \begin_layout Enumerate
6769 \begin_inset Argument 1
6772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6795 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
6802 \begin_layout Enumerate
6803 \begin_inset Argument 1
6806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6829 \begin_layout Enumerate
6831 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
6838 \begin_layout Enumerate
6839 \begin_inset Argument 1
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6863 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
6870 \begin_layout Enumerate
6871 \begin_inset Argument 1
6874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6900 \begin_layout Standard
6901 For this list these commands were used:
6904 \begin_layout Standard
6915 \begin_inset Newline newline
6923 \begin_inset Newline newline
6931 \begin_inset Newline newline
6941 \begin_layout Standard
6948 makes the label emphasized and
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6966 When you changed the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6967 lists until you change the definition.
6975 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6977 \begin_inset Index idx
6980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6983 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6991 \begin_layout Standard
6992 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6995 \begin_layout Enumerate
6996 \begin_inset Argument 1
6999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7018 \begin_inset Note Note
7021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 goes back to default numbering
7032 \begin_layout Enumerate
7036 \begin_layout Standard
7040 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7044 \begin_layout Standard
7045 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7050 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7051 to indicate that it is a resumed
7052 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7053 , but in the output.
7056 \begin_layout Standard
7057 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7074 \begin_layout Standard
7075 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number than the
7077 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7078 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7079 of a normal new enumeration.
7080 There insert the command
7083 \begin_layout Standard
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7094 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7098 \begin_layout Enumerate
7102 \begin_layout Enumerate
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7107 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7110 \begin_layout Enumerate
7111 \begin_inset Argument 1
7114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7130 This enumeration starts at 4
7133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7135 \begin_inset Index idx
7138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7147 \begin_layout Standard
7148 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7150 For example the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7153 \begin_layout Itemize
7157 \begin_layout Itemize
7158 with standard spacing
7161 \begin_layout Standard
7162 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7164 There add the command
7168 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7171 \begin_layout Itemize
7172 \begin_inset Argument 1
7175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7194 \begin_layout Itemize
7198 \begin_layout Itemize
7202 \begin_layout Standard
7203 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7210 \begin_inset Index idx
7213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7215 -packages ! enumitem
7221 For more info see its documentation,
7222 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7232 \begin_layout Standard
7233 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7235 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to the one of the
7236 paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7240 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7243 \begin_layout Enumerate
7244 \begin_inset Argument 1
7247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7255 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7268 \begin_layout Enumerate
7269 with negative indentation
7272 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7273 Further Customization
7274 \begin_inset Index idx
7277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7287 You can also change the style of description lists.
7291 \begin_layout Standard
7297 \begin_layout Standard
7298 changes the description label font, the command
7301 \begin_layout Standard
7307 \begin_layout Standard
7308 sets the list style.
7311 \begin_layout Standard
7312 An example where the command
7315 \begin_layout Standard
7320 itshape, style=nextline
7323 \begin_layout Standard
7327 \begin_layout Description
7329 \begin_inset space ~
7333 \begin_inset Argument 1
7336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7342 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7344 itshape, style=nextline
7354 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7355 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7359 \begin_layout Description
7361 \begin_inset space ~
7364 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7365 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7366 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7369 \begin_layout Standard
7370 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7376 \begin_inset Index idx
7379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7383 -packages ! enumitem
7389 For more info see its documentation,
7390 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7400 \begin_layout Subsection
7402 \begin_inset Index idx
7405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7414 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7422 \begin_inset space ~
7430 \begin_layout Standard
7431 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7432 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7440 \begin_inset space ~
7446 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7447 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7448 gags on the document.
7449 In contrast, you can use the
7456 \begin_inset space ~
7461 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7462 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7466 \begin_layout Standard
7467 Of course, you're not limited to using
7474 \begin_inset space ~
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7488 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7489 some European academic papers.
7492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7496 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7503 \begin_layout Standard
7508 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7509 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7513 \begin_inset space ~
7518 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7519 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7520 Here's an example of each:
7523 \begin_layout Right Address
7525 \begin_inset Newline newline
7529 \begin_inset Newline newline
7533 \begin_inset Newline newline
7536 When is it? What is today?
7539 \begin_layout Standard
7543 \begin_inset space ~
7549 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7551 the largest block of text on a single line.
7552 Here's an example of the
7559 \begin_layout Address
7561 \begin_inset Newline newline
7564 Where do I send this
7565 \begin_inset Newline newline
7568 Your post office and country
7571 \begin_layout Standard
7572 As you can see, both
7579 \begin_inset space ~
7584 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7589 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7590 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7596 This makes sense, since
7604 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7605 Thus, you have to use
7612 arg "newline-insert newline"
7618 \begin_inset space ~
7621 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7632 menu) to start a new line in an
7639 \begin_inset space ~
7647 \begin_layout Subsection
7651 \begin_layout Standard
7652 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7653 or list of references.
7655 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7658 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7662 \begin_inset Index idx
7665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7674 \begin_layout Standard
7679 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7680 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7681 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7682 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7686 in anything else or vice versa.
7692 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7693 The book document classes ignores the
7697 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7701 in a letter document class.
7704 \begin_layout Standard
7709 environment does several things for you.
7710 First, it puts the centered label
7711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7719 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7721 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7722 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7723 the subsequent text.
7724 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7726 The appearance in the output depends on the used article or report class.
7729 \begin_layout Standard
7730 Starting a new paragraph by hitting
7734 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7735 The new paragraph will still be in the
7740 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7741 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7744 \begin_layout Standard
7745 \begin_inset Float figure
7750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7752 \begin_inset Graphics
7753 filename ../clipart/Abstract.pdf
7760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7761 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7766 name "cap:Paragraph-in-the"
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 We'd love to give you directly an example of the
7792 environment, but since this document is in the
7793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7800 class, we can't do this.
7801 We inserted it therefore as figure
7802 \begin_inset space ~
7806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7808 reference "cap:Paragraph-in-the"
7813 If you've never heard of an
7814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7821 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7824 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7830 \begin_inset Index idx
7833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7842 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7849 \begin_layout Standard
7854 environment is used to list references.
7855 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7856 only use it at the end of the document.
7861 in anything else or vice versa won't work.
7864 \begin_layout Standard
7865 When you first open a
7869 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7870 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7886 depending on the document class.
7887 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7888 Each paragraph of the
7892 environment is a bibliography entry.
7897 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7898 Each new paragraph is still in the
7905 \begin_layout Standard
7906 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7907 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7909 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7911 handling, have a look at in section
7912 \begin_inset space ~
7916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7918 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7925 \begin_layout Subsection
7930 \begin_inset Index idx
7933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7934 Paragraph ! \SpecialChar LyX
7941 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7943 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7950 \begin_layout Standard
7956 environment is another \SpecialChar LyX
7958 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7963 key as a fixed whitespace;
7967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7980 \begin_inset space ~
7985 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7990 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
7992 If you need to insert blank lines, you'll still need to use
7995 arg "newline-insert newline"
8012 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8013 So, when you finish using the
8018 environment, you'll need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8019 Also, you can nest the
8024 environment inside of others.
8027 \begin_layout Standard
8028 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8031 \begin_layout Itemize
8035 arg "newline-insert newline"
8038 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8043 \begin_inset space \space{}
8053 arg "newline-insert newline"
8059 \begin_layout Itemize
8063 arg "newline-insert newline"
8071 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8078 \begin_layout Itemize
8083 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
8090 \begin_layout Itemize
8094 arg "space-insert protected"
8101 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8103 You must put at least one
8107 in any line you want blank.
8108 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8112 \begin_layout Itemize
8113 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8117 since that will insert
8122 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8125 arg "self-insert \""
8131 \begin_layout Standard
8135 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8139 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8143 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8147 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8151 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8152 printf("Hello World!
8157 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8161 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8165 \begin_layout Standard
8166 This is just the standard
8167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8178 \begin_layout Standard
8184 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
8185 rc-files, and so on.
8186 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8187 as if you used a typewriter.
8188 \begin_inset Index idx
8191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8192 Paragraph environments|)
8197 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8200 Program Code Listings
8209 \begin_layout Section
8210 Nesting Environments
8211 \begin_inset Index idx
8214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8215 Nesting ! Environments
8221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8230 \begin_layout Subsection
8234 \begin_layout Standard
8236 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8238 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8240 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8242 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8254 \begin_layout Enumerate
8258 \begin_layout Enumerate
8260 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8267 \begin_layout Enumerate
8271 \begin_layout Enumerate
8276 \begin_layout Enumerate
8280 \begin_layout Standard
8281 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8282 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8285 \begin_inset space ~
8289 \begin_inset space ~
8297 \begin_inset space ~
8301 \begin_inset space ~
8310 menu to change the nesting depth of the current paragraph (the status bar
8311 will tell you how far you are nested).
8312 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8315 arg "depth-increment"
8321 arg "depth-decrement"
8324 or the convenient key bindings
8335 arg "depth-increment"
8341 arg "depth-decrement"
8344 to change the nesting level.
8345 The change will work on the current selection if you have made one (allowing
8346 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8350 \begin_layout Standard
8351 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8352 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8353 If it's invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8354 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8355 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8358 \begin_layout Standard
8359 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8361 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8363 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8366 \begin_layout Subsection
8367 What You Can and Can't Nest
8370 \begin_layout Standard
8371 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8372 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8375 \begin_layout Standard
8376 The question if nesting a paragraph environment is possible, is a bit more
8377 complicated than a simple yes or no.
8378 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8381 \begin_layout Itemize
8382 Completely unnestable
8385 \begin_layout Itemize
8386 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8390 \begin_layout Itemize
8391 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8395 \begin_layout Standard
8396 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8397 environments have them:
8400 \begin_layout Description
8401 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8402 Can't nest into them.
8403 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8410 \begin_layout Itemize
8416 \begin_layout Itemize
8422 \begin_layout Itemize
8428 \begin_layout Itemize
8434 \begin_layout Itemize
8441 \begin_layout Description
8443 \begin_inset space ~
8446 Nestable You can nest them.
8447 You can nest other things into them.
8448 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8455 \begin_layout Itemize
8461 \begin_layout Itemize
8467 \begin_layout Itemize
8473 \begin_layout Itemize
8479 \begin_layout Itemize
8485 \begin_layout Itemize
8491 \begin_layout Itemize
8497 \begin_layout Itemize
8505 \begin_layout Description
8506 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8507 You can't nest anything into them.
8508 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8515 \begin_layout Itemize
8521 \begin_layout Itemize
8527 \begin_layout Itemize
8533 \begin_layout Itemize
8539 \begin_layout Itemize
8545 \begin_layout Itemize
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 \begin_layout Itemize
8569 \begin_layout Itemize
8575 \begin_layout Itemize
8581 \begin_layout Itemize
8587 \begin_layout Itemize
8593 \begin_layout Itemize
8597 \begin_inset space ~
8603 \begin_layout Itemize
8610 \begin_layout Standard
8611 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8619 Although it is possible to nest numbered section headings like
8628 \begin_inset space ~
8632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8636 \begin_inset space \space{}
8639 lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create
8640 well structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested
8641 section headings violate this.
8649 \begin_layout Subsection
8650 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8651 \begin_inset Index idx
8654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8655 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8663 \begin_layout Standard
8664 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8665 affected by nesting anyhow.
8669 \begin_layout Itemize
8673 \begin_layout Itemize
8677 \begin_layout Itemize
8681 \begin_layout Standard
8683 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8691 Figures and tables in
8695 are not affected by this.
8700 Have a look at section
8701 \begin_inset space ~
8705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8707 reference "sec:Floats"
8711 for more information about
8718 \begin_layout Standard
8720 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8721 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8725 \begin_layout Standard
8726 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8734 of its own, it behaves just like a
8735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8742 paragraph environment.
8743 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8747 \begin_layout Standard
8748 Here's an example with a table:
8751 \begin_layout Enumerate
8753 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8760 \begin_layout Enumerate
8761 This is (a) and it's nested.
8762 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8769 \begin_layout Standard
8770 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8776 \begin_layout Standard
8778 \begin_inset Tabular
8779 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8780 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8781 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8782 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8866 \begin_layout Standard
8867 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8874 \begin_layout Enumerate
8876 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8880 \begin_layout Enumerate
8884 \begin_layout Standard
8885 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8888 \begin_layout Enumerate
8890 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8897 \begin_layout Enumerate
8898 This is (a) and it's nested.
8902 \begin_layout Standard
8903 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8911 \begin_inset Tabular
8912 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8913 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8914 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8915 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8999 \begin_layout Standard
9000 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9006 \begin_layout Enumerate
9013 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9016 \begin_layout Enumerate
9020 \begin_layout Standard
9021 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9025 \begin_layout Standard
9026 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9029 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9032 \begin_layout Enumerate
9034 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9041 \begin_layout Enumerate
9042 This is (a) and it's nested.
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9046 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9052 \begin_layout Standard
9054 \begin_inset Tabular
9055 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9056 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9057 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9058 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9142 \begin_layout Standard
9143 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9149 \begin_layout Enumerate
9151 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9159 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 \begin_layout Standard
9164 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9170 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9171 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9175 \begin_layout Subsection
9176 Usage and General Features
9179 \begin_layout Standard
9180 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9181 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9190 is the innermost possible depth.
9191 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9194 \begin_layout Enumerate
9195 level #1 – outermost
9196 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9203 \begin_layout Enumerate
9205 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9212 \begin_layout Enumerate
9214 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9221 \begin_layout Enumerate
9223 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9230 \begin_layout Itemize
9232 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9239 \begin_layout Itemize
9248 \begin_layout Standard
9249 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9250 both of them in the example.
9251 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9261 For example, if we tried to nest another
9266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9273 , we would get errors.
9276 \begin_layout Subsection
9278 \begin_inset Index idx
9281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9290 \begin_layout Standard
9291 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9292 We have several examples of nested environments.
9293 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9298 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9301 \begin_layout Labeling
9302 \labelwidthstring MMM
9303 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9309 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9316 \begin_layout Labeling
9317 \labelwidthstring MMM
9318 #2-a This is level #2.
9319 We created it by using
9322 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9328 arg "depth-increment"
9332 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9339 \begin_layout Labeling
9340 \labelwidthstring MMM
9341 #3-a This is level #3.
9342 This time, we just hit
9349 arg "depth-increment"
9353 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9357 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9363 arg "depth-increment"
9367 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9374 \begin_layout Standard
9379 environment, nested inside of
9380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9388 So, it's at level #4.
9389 We did this by hitting
9392 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9398 arg "depth-increment"
9401 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9406 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9422 \begin_layout Standard
9427 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9430 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9436 \begin_layout Labeling
9437 \labelwidthstring MMM
9438 #4-a This is level #4.
9442 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9445 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9450 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9454 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9459 keep nesting things inside
9460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9468 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9475 \begin_layout Labeling
9476 \labelwidthstring MMM
9477 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9479 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9486 \begin_layout Labeling
9487 \labelwidthstring MMM
9488 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9489 and this is level #6.
9490 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9494 \begin_layout Labeling
9495 \labelwidthstring MMM
9496 #5-b Back to level #5.
9500 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9506 arg "depth-decrement"
9513 \begin_layout Labeling
9514 \labelwidthstring MMM
9518 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9524 arg "depth-decrement"
9527 , we're back at level #4.
9531 \begin_layout Labeling
9532 \labelwidthstring MMM
9533 #3-b Back to level #3.
9534 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9538 \begin_layout Labeling
9539 \labelwidthstring MMM
9540 #2-b Back to level #2.
9545 \begin_layout Labeling
9546 \labelwidthstring MMM
9547 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9548 After this sentence, we'll hit
9552 and change the paragraph environment back to
9559 \begin_layout Standard
9560 We could have also used the
9576 environment in place of the
9581 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9585 Example 2: Inheritance
9588 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9589 This is the \SpecialChar LyX
9590 -Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9593 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9602 arg "depth-increment"
9605 , after which, we'll change to the
9610 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9617 \begin_layout Enumerate
9622 environment, at level #2.
9625 \begin_layout Enumerate
9626 Notice how the nested
9630 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9635 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9639 \begin_layout Standard
9640 We ended this example by hitting
9645 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9649 and reset the nesting depth by using
9652 arg "depth-decrement"
9658 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9659 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9668 \begin_inset Argument 1
9671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9672 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9680 \begin_layout Enumerate
9681 This is level #1, in an
9685 paragraph environment.
9686 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9687 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9694 \begin_layout Enumerate
9699 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9705 arg "depth-increment"
9709 Now, what happens if we nest an
9713 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9714 label be? An asterisk?
9715 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9722 \begin_layout Itemize
9732 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9733 So, its label is a bullet.
9734 (We got here by using
9737 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9743 arg "depth-increment"
9746 , then changing the environment to
9751 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9758 \begin_layout Itemize
9759 Here's level #4, produced using
9762 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9768 arg "depth-increment"
9772 We'll do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9774 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9781 \begin_layout Enumerate
9784 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9789 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9793 , because we are in the
9802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9821 \begin_layout Enumerate
9826 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9827 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9831 \begin_layout Enumerate
9832 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9835 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9838 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9841 \begin_layout Enumerate
9845 arg "depth-decrement"
9848 to decrease the depth after the next
9851 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9858 \begin_layout Enumerate
9860 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9865 \begin_layout Enumerate
9867 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9868 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9872 \begin_layout Enumerate
9873 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9882 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9887 reset the counter for the label.
9891 \begin_layout Enumerate
9895 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9901 arg "depth-decrement"
9904 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9905 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9906 into the twofold-nested
9914 \begin_layout Enumerate
9915 The same thing happens if we do another
9918 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9924 arg "depth-decrement"
9927 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9930 \begin_layout Standard
9931 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9936 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9951 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9958 The same rule applies for the
9962 environment, as well.
9965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9966 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9969 \begin_layout Enumerate
9970 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9971 We won't nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into the
9972 same detail with how we did it.
9978 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9985 \begin_layout Standard
9993 arg "depth-increment"
10000 : level #2) We'll stick an encapsulated description of how we created the
10001 example in parentheses someplace.
10002 For example, the two keybindings are how we changed the depth.
10003 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10004 Either before or after this, we'll put in the level.
10008 \begin_layout Enumerate
10013 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10014 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
10021 \begin_layout Verse
10022 Now we'll add verse.
10023 \begin_inset Newline newline
10026 It will get much worse.
10027 \begin_inset Newline newline
10037 arg "depth-increment"
10047 \begin_layout Verse
10048 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10049 \begin_inset Newline newline
10052 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10053 \begin_inset Newline newline
10059 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10067 \begin_layout Verse
10068 Here comes a table:
10069 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
10076 \begin_layout Standard
10077 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10083 \begin_layout Standard
10085 \begin_inset Tabular
10086 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10087 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10088 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10089 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10174 \begin_layout Verse
10178 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10188 arg "depth-increment"
10194 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10204 arg "depth-decrement"
10211 \begin_layout Enumerate
10216 : level #1) This is another item.
10217 Note that selecting a
10221 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10222 3 times to put the table inside the
10230 \begin_layout Quotation
10231 We're now ending the
10235 list and changing to
10240 We're still at level #1.
10241 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10242 The next set of paragraphs is a
10243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10250 We'll nest both the
10257 \begin_inset space ~
10262 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10266 for the letter body.
10270 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10273 to preserve the depth.
10274 Remember that you need to use
10277 arg "newline-insert newline"
10280 to create multiple lines inside the
10287 \begin_inset space ~
10294 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
10301 \begin_layout Right Address
10303 \begin_inset Newline newline
10306 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10307 \begin_inset Newline newline
10313 \begin_layout Address
10315 \begin_inset space ~
10321 \begin_layout Quotation
10322 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10326 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10327 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10328 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10329 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10330 as soon as possible.
10331 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10334 \begin_layout Quotation
10335 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10336 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10337 with your order, along with payment.
10340 \begin_layout Quotation
10341 We thank you again for your patience.
10344 \begin_layout Address
10346 \begin_inset Newline newline
10353 \begin_layout Quotation
10354 That ends that example!
10357 \begin_layout Standard
10358 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10359 gives you a lot of power with just
10361 We could have easily nested an
10382 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10385 \begin_layout Section
10386 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10387 \begin_inset Index idx
10390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10399 \begin_layout Standard
10400 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10401 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10403 more spaces: Spaces of different width and spaces which can or cannot be
10404 broken at the end of a line.
10405 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10409 \begin_layout Subsection
10411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10413 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10418 \begin_inset Index idx
10421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10430 \begin_layout Standard
10431 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10432 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10433 ) not to break the line at
10435 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky linebreaks, like in:
10438 \begin_layout Quote
10439 Further documentation is given in section
10440 \begin_inset Newline newline
10444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10446 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10454 \begin_layout Standard
10455 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10470 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10479 A protected space is set with
10481 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10482 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10486 \begin_inset space ~
10496 arg "space-insert protected"
10502 \begin_layout Subsection
10504 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10506 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10511 \begin_inset Index idx
10514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10515 Spacing ! Horizontal
10523 \begin_layout Standard
10524 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10526 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10527 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10531 The length units are listed in Appendix
10532 \begin_inset space ~
10536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10538 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
10545 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10549 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10554 \begin_inset Index idx
10557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10558 Spaces ! Inter-word
10566 \begin_layout Standard
10568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10572 \begin_inset space \space{}
10575 English) have the typographical convention to add extra space after an end-of-se
10576 ntence punctuation mark, and \SpecialChar LyX
10577 honors those conventions (see section
10578 \begin_inset space ~
10582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10584 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10589 Sometimes, you want a normal space nevertheless.
10590 In this case, insert an inter-word space (shortcut
10593 arg "space-insert normal"
10599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10603 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10608 \begin_inset Index idx
10611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10620 \begin_layout Standard
10622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10629 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10638 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10639 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance
10640 inside abbreviations:
10643 \begin_layout Quote
10645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10649 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10652 \begin_layout Standard
10653 or between values and units.
10654 Compare for example this:
10655 \begin_inset Newline newline
10659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10663 \begin_inset Newline newline
10666 10 kg (normal space
10669 \begin_layout Standard
10670 You can insert thin spaces also with the menu
10672 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10673 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10675 \begin_inset space ~
10683 arg "space-insert thin"
10689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10693 name "subsec:More-Spaces"
10700 \begin_layout Standard
10701 You can furthermore insert the following space types:
10704 \begin_layout Description
10706 \begin_inset space ~
10710 \begin_inset space ~
10713 space A line with a
10714 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10718 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10722 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10725 Negative thin space between the arrows.
10728 \begin_layout Description
10730 \begin_inset space ~
10734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10738 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10742 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10746 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10753 em) space between the arrows.
10756 \begin_layout Description
10758 \begin_inset space ~
10762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10766 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10770 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10774 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10778 \begin_inset space ~
10782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10785 em) space between the arrows.
10788 \begin_layout Description
10790 \begin_inset space ~
10794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10798 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10802 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10806 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10810 \begin_inset space ~
10814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10817 em) space between the arrows.
10820 \begin_layout Description
10822 \begin_inset space ~
10826 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10830 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10835 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10842 cm space between the arrows.
10845 \begin_layout Standard
10847 \begin_inset space ~
10851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10853 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10857 lists the different space sizes.
10860 \begin_layout Standard
10861 \begin_inset Float table
10866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10868 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10873 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10877 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10887 \begin_inset Tabular
10888 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10889 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10890 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10891 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11108 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11114 \begin_inset Index idx
11117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11126 \begin_layout Standard
11127 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11128 feature for adding extra space
11129 in a uniform fashion.
11130 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11131 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11132 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11133 equally between themselves.
11137 \begin_layout Standard
11138 Here a few examples what you can do with them:
11141 \begin_layout Quote
11143 This is on the left side
11144 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11147 This is on the right
11150 \begin_layout Quote
11153 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11157 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11163 \begin_layout Quote
11166 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11170 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11174 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11180 \begin_layout Standard
11181 That was an example in the
11187 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11191 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11195 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11198 is one in a standard paragraph.
11199 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11203 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11206 \begin_layout Standard
11207 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11210 \begin_inset space ~
11215 in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11218 \begin_layout Standard
11220 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11224 \begin_inset space ~
11230 \begin_layout Standard
11232 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11236 \begin_inset space ~
11242 \begin_layout Standard
11244 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11248 \begin_inset space ~
11254 \begin_layout Standard
11256 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11260 \begin_inset space ~
11266 \begin_layout Standard
11268 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11272 \begin_inset space ~
11278 \begin_layout Standard
11280 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11284 \begin_inset space ~
11290 \begin_layout Standard
11291 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11299 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11303 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11305 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11306 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11310 option in the space dialog.
11318 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11322 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11327 \begin_inset Index idx
11330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11339 \begin_layout Standard
11340 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11346 \begin_inset space \space{}
11349 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11352 \begin_layout Standard
11353 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11356 What is correct English?:
11357 \begin_inset Newline newline
11361 \begin_inset Newline newline
11365 \begin_inset space ~
11368 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11369 \begin_inset Newline newline
11373 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11384 \begin_inset Newline newline
11388 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11399 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11405 \begin_layout Standard
11406 So that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11411 \begin_inset space ~
11415 \begin_inset space ~
11419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11423 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11425 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11426 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11430 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11436 \begin_inset space ~
11440 \begin_inset space ~
11444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11447 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11456 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11457 That is why it is named
11458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11466 The normal phantom ouputs the width and heigth of the content as space,
11467 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11471 \begin_layout Subsection
11473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11475 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11480 \begin_inset Index idx
11483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11492 \begin_layout Standard
11493 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11495 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11496 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11498 \begin_inset space ~
11504 There you find the following sizes:
11507 \begin_layout Standard
11520 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11521 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11526 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11528 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11532 \begin_inset Index idx
11535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11536 Document ! Settings
11541 for the paragraph separation.
11542 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11553 \begin_layout Standard
11559 \begin_inset Index idx
11562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11568 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11569 An example: You have only two short paragraphs on one page with a vfill
11571 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11572 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11581 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11590 s are described in section
11591 \begin_inset space ~
11595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11597 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11606 If there are several
11610 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11611 You can therefore use
11615 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11618 \begin_layout Standard
11623 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11624 \begin_inset space ~
11628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11630 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
11637 \begin_layout Standard
11638 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11648 When the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11649 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11661 \begin_layout Subsection
11662 Paragraph Alignment
11665 \begin_layout Standard
11666 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11668 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11672 There are five possibilities:
11675 \begin_layout Itemize
11683 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11689 \begin_layout Itemize
11697 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11703 \begin_layout Itemize
11711 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11717 \begin_layout Itemize
11725 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11731 \begin_layout Itemize
11739 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11745 \begin_layout Standard
11746 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11747 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11748 the left and right margins.
11749 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11750 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
11756 \begin_layout Standard
11758 This paragraph is right aligned,
11761 \begin_layout Standard
11763 this one is centered,
11766 \begin_layout Standard
11768 this one is left aligned.
11771 \begin_layout Subsection
11773 \begin_inset Index idx
11776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11777 Page breaks ! Forced
11783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11785 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11792 \begin_layout Standard
11793 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11794 does the pagebreaks in your document, you can
11795 force a page break where you want one.
11796 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11797 is good at page breaking.
11798 Only if you use a lot of
11802 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11803 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11806 \begin_layout Standard
11807 We recommend not to use forced pagebreaks until the text is finished and
11808 until you have checked in the preview to see if you
11812 have to change the page breaking.
11815 \begin_layout Standard
11816 There are two types of pagebreaks: One that ends the page without any special
11818 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11821 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11823 \begin_inset space ~
11829 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11832 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11834 \begin_inset space ~
11839 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11841 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11842 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11845 \begin_layout Standard
11846 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11847 at the top of a page.
11848 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11850 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11851 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11852 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11856 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11860 to learn more about
11867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11871 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11876 \begin_inset Index idx
11879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11880 Page breaks ! Clear
11888 \begin_layout Standard
11889 Rather than forced pagebreaks where the content behind the break is placed
11890 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11891 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11892 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed behind
11893 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11896 \begin_layout Standard
11897 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11899 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11900 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11902 \begin_inset space ~
11908 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11911 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11913 \begin_inset space ~
11917 \begin_inset space ~
11922 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11923 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11926 \begin_layout Subsection
11928 \begin_inset Index idx
11931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11940 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11947 \begin_layout Standard
11948 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: One that simply
11950 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11952 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11953 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11955 \begin_inset space ~
11959 \begin_inset space ~
11967 arg "newline-insert newline"
11971 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11973 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11974 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11976 \begin_inset space ~
11980 \begin_inset space ~
11985 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11987 This is necessary to avoid
11988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11995 in justified paragraphs due to whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11998 \begin_layout Standard
11999 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12000 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12002 very good at line breaking.
12003 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to actively
12004 set a line break, e.
12005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12009 \begin_inset space \space{}
12012 in a poem or for an address (see sections
12013 \begin_inset space ~
12017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12019 reference "sec:Quote"
12024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12026 reference "sec:Verse"
12031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12033 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12040 \begin_layout Subsection
12042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12044 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12049 \begin_inset Index idx
12052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12061 \begin_layout Standard
12063 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12074 \begin_layout Standard
12077 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12078 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12080 \begin_inset space ~
12085 you can insert horizontal lines.
12086 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12087 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12088 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12091 \begin_layout Standard
12093 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12104 \begin_layout Standard
12108 \begin_layout Section
12109 Characters and Symbols
12112 \begin_layout Standard
12113 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12114 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter e.
12115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12119 \begin_inset space \space{}
12122 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12130 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12134 for information on how this is done.
12137 \begin_layout Standard
12138 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12143 dialog via the menu
12145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12146 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12152 \begin_layout Standard
12153 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12161 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12162 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12164 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12172 \begin_layout Section
12173 Fonts and Text Styles
12174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12176 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12183 \begin_layout Subsection
12185 \begin_inset Index idx
12188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12197 \begin_layout Standard
12198 There are two types of fonts:
12201 \begin_layout Description
12203 \begin_inset space ~
12207 \begin_inset Index idx
12210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12216 are fonts, built from outlines of the single glyphs (i.
12217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12221 characters) in the font.
12222 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12223 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12224 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12225 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12226 This means that outline fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12227 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12228 to provide a good image, it might be hard to provide a good rendering.
12229 \begin_inset Newline newline
12232 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12233 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12234 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12235 sizes than at small ones.
12236 \begin_inset Newline newline
12250 \begin_inset space ~
12258 \begin_layout Description
12260 \begin_inset space ~
12264 \begin_inset Index idx
12267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12273 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start, so they
12274 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12275 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12276 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12277 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in a
12278 picture manipulation program.
12279 In order to relieve this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12280 several fixed sizes typically from around 8 pixels high up to 34 pixels
12281 or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12282 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12283 to display each glyph, so bitmap fonts are thus faster displayed than scalable
12285 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12286 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12287 \begin_inset Newline newline
12290 Bitmap fonts are named
12293 \begin_inset space ~
12298 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12301 \begin_layout Standard
12302 The result of all this, is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they
12303 are designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12304 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12305 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12306 use scalable fonts.
12309 \begin_layout Standard
12310 To test which fonts are used in a PDF-document, you can have a look into
12311 its document properties.
12314 \begin_layout Standard
12315 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12316 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12317 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12318 font to emphasize text, you use an
12319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12327 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12329 In \SpecialChar LyX
12330 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12334 \begin_layout Subsection
12337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12339 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12346 \begin_layout Standard
12347 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12348 uses its own fonts.
12349 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12350 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12353 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12354 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12355 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12356 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited, compared
12357 to usual word processors.
12358 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12359 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12360 files are very portable across
12361 different machines.
12362 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12363 was increased a lot
12364 meanwhile so that you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
12365 In \SpecialChar LyX
12366 , only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
12368 \begin_inset space ~
12372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12374 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12379 However, all others are available if you enter the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
12381 the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
12385 \begin_layout Standard
12386 Furthermore, recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12387 engines that are also
12388 able to directly access fonts that are installed for your operating system
12389 (OS), namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12390 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12392 Both engines are now supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12394 By using them, you can use theoretically any OpenType or TrueType font
12395 that is installed on your system.
12396 The next section describes how to use these OS fonts.
12399 \begin_layout Standard
12400 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12408 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12409 es; so you might have to experiment.
12417 \begin_layout Standard
12418 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12427 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12428 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12429 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12430 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12439 \begin_layout Subsection
12440 Document Font and Font size
12441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12443 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12448 \begin_inset Index idx
12451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12458 \begin_inset Index idx
12461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12470 \begin_layout Standard
12471 You can set the document fonts in the
12473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12477 \begin_inset Index idx
12480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12481 Document ! Settings
12487 There you can specify which font should be used for the three different
12488 font shapes roman (serif),
12491 \begin_inset space ~
12503 \begin_layout Standard
12504 The possible options for the font include
12508 and a list of fonts available on your system.
12513 uses the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12521 \begin_inset space ~
12527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12540 European Computer Modern
12543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12553 \begin_layout Standard
12562 are bitmap fonts, they often looks pixelated in PDF output, especially
12563 when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12568 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12571 \begin_inset space ~
12576 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12582 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12583 There are three ways to use one:
12586 \begin_layout Itemize
12590 \begin_inset space ~
12595 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12608 \begin_inset space ~
12613 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12614 community in order to replace
12618 as the default font.
12619 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12620 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12623 \begin_inset space ~
12636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12637 One difference is improved kerning.
12645 \begin_layout Itemize
12649 \begin_inset space ~
12653 \begin_inset space ~
12658 fonts in (the rare) case that
12661 \begin_inset space ~
12666 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12681 Virtual means that it
12682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12693 -glyphs from other fonts.
12694 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12716 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12722 \begin_inset Index idx
12725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12729 -packages ! aeguill
12734 with the document preamble line
12735 \begin_inset Newline newline
12742 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12743 \begin_inset Newline newline
12748 will fix the guillemet problem.
12753 and that accented characters are not
12757 glyph, but build of
12761 characters, the accent and the letter.
12762 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12768 If you search for example for the French word
12769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12776 in a PDF, you won't get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches for
12778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12785 and not for the glyph
12786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12790 \begin_inset space ~
12794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12800 \begin_layout Itemize
12801 If you do not like the look of
12809 , you can of course select one of the other provided vector fonts, e.
12810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12814 \begin_inset space ~
12820 \begin_inset space ~
12832 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12836 serif and typewriter fonts
12840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12841 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12848 \begin_inset space ~
12857 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12862 \begin_inset space \space{}
12870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12874 \begin_inset space \space{}
12880 \begin_inset space ~
12888 \begin_inset space ~
12898 , but you can also select your own.
12899 \begin_inset Newline newline
12902 The differences between roman,
12905 \begin_inset space ~
12914 fonts are explained in section
12915 \begin_inset space ~
12919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12921 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12926 \begin_inset Newline newline
12932 \begin_inset space ~
12937 was originally designed for newspapers.
12938 That means its glyphs are smaller than the ones from other fonts to fit
12939 into the small newspaper columns.
12943 \begin_inset space ~
12948 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12951 \begin_layout Standard
12952 For the font size there are four possible values:
12969 depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12970 -system, normally it is equal to the font size 10.
12973 \begin_layout Standard
12974 The font sizes are the
12979 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
12980 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
12981 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12982 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12985 \begin_inset space ~
12991 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12992 \begin_inset space ~
12996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12998 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13005 \begin_layout Standard
13010 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13011 a font to display the script characters.
13015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13016 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13022 So this has no effect for the document language
13038 \begin_layout Standard
13039 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13043 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13051 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13056 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13057 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13059 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13061 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13064 dialog, see section
13065 \begin_inset space ~
13069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13071 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13083 \begin_layout Subsection
13084 Using Different Character Styles
13085 \begin_inset Index idx
13088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13095 \begin_inset Index idx
13098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13107 \begin_layout Standard
13108 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13109 automatically changes the character style for certain
13110 paragraph environments.
13112 supports two character styles,
13121 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
13125 \begin_layout Standard
13130 style, do one of the following:
13133 \begin_layout Itemize
13134 click on the toolbar button
13143 \begin_layout Itemize
13144 use the key binding
13153 \begin_layout Standard
13154 These commands are all toggles.
13159 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13162 \begin_layout Standard
13163 One typically uses the
13167 style for proper names.
13169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13176 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13184 \begin_layout Standard
13185 A more widely used character style is the
13190 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13197 \begin_layout Itemize
13198 clicking on the toolbar button
13207 \begin_layout Itemize
13208 using the keybindings
13217 \begin_layout Standard
13222 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13224 use a different font.
13227 \begin_layout Standard
13228 We've been using the
13232 style all over the place in this document.
13233 Here's one more example:
13236 \begin_layout Quotation
13239 Don't overuse character styles!
13242 \begin_layout Standard
13243 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13244 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13245 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13246 the common tendency to overuse character style.
13250 \begin_layout Standard
13251 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13259 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13261 \begin_inset space ~
13269 \begin_layout Subsection
13270 Fine-Tuning with the Text Style dialog
13271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13273 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13278 \begin_inset Index idx
13281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13290 \begin_layout Standard
13291 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning, so
13293 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13294 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13295 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13296 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13297 from ordinary dialog.
13300 \begin_layout Standard
13301 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13302 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13303 \begin_inset Newline newline
13306 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not well readable and
13307 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13310 \begin_layout Standard
13311 To use custom character styles, open the
13313 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13315 \begin_inset space ~
13320 dialog or press the toolbar button
13323 arg "dialog-show character"
13327 There are several boxes on this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13328 font property which you can choose.
13329 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13332 \begin_inset space ~
13337 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13342 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13343 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13344 environments in a snap.
13347 \begin_layout Standard
13348 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13351 \begin_inset space ~
13363 \begin_layout Labeling
13364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13378 The possible options are:
13379 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
13386 \begin_layout Labeling
13387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13392 This is the Roman font family.
13393 Normally a serif font.
13394 It's also the default family.
13404 \begin_layout Labeling
13405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13409 \begin_inset space ~
13416 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13428 \begin_layout Labeling
13429 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13436 This is the Typewriter font family.
13442 arg "font-typewriter"
13451 \begin_layout Labeling
13452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13457 This corresponds to the print weight.
13459 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
13466 \begin_layout Labeling
13467 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13472 This is the Medium font series.
13473 It's also the default series.
13476 \begin_layout Labeling
13477 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13484 This is the Bold font series.
13497 \begin_layout Labeling
13498 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13503 As the name implies.
13505 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
13512 \begin_layout Labeling
13513 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13518 This is the Upright font shape.
13519 It's also the default shape.
13522 \begin_layout Labeling
13523 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13537 s the Italic font shape
13543 \begin_layout Labeling
13544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13551 This is the Slanted font shape
13553 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13554 , this is different from italic).
13557 \begin_layout Labeling
13558 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13562 \begin_inset space ~
13569 This is the Small caps font shape
13576 \begin_layout Labeling
13577 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13582 Alters the size of the font.
13583 You'll find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportio
13584 nal to the document font size.
13585 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
13586 the details, but a general description of what
13589 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
13596 \begin_layout Labeling
13597 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13618 arg "font-size tiny"
13624 \begin_layout Labeling
13625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13646 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13652 \begin_layout Labeling
13653 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13674 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13680 \begin_layout Labeling
13681 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13702 arg "font-size small"
13708 \begin_layout Labeling
13709 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13723 It's also the default size.
13727 arg "font-size normal"
13733 \begin_layout Labeling
13734 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13755 arg "font-size large"
13761 \begin_layout Labeling
13762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13783 arg "font-size larger"
13789 \begin_layout Labeling
13790 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13811 arg "font-size largest"
13817 \begin_layout Labeling
13818 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13839 arg "font-size huge"
13845 \begin_layout Labeling
13846 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13867 arg "font-size giant"
13874 \begin_layout Standard
13879 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13880 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13882 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13883 — use that instead.
13884 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13887 \begin_layout Labeling
13888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13893 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13895 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
13902 \begin_layout Labeling
13903 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13910 This is text with emphasize on
13913 This might seem like the same as
13917 , but it is actually a bit different.
13923 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13925 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13928 \begin_layout Labeling
13929 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13936 This is text with Underbar on.
13942 arg "font-underline"
13948 \begin_inset Newline newline
13953 Avoid using underbar if you can! It's a hangover from the typewriter days,
13954 when you couldn't change fonts.
13955 We no longer need to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13956 It is only included in \SpecialChar LyX
13957 because some people
13961 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13964 \begin_layout Labeling
13965 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13969 \begin_inset space ~
13974 This is text with Double underbar on.
13978 arg "font-underunderline"
13982 \begin_inset Newline newline
13985 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13986 about double underbar.
13989 \begin_layout Labeling
13990 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13994 \begin_inset space ~
13999 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14003 arg "font-underwave"
14007 \begin_inset Newline newline
14010 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14011 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14014 \begin_layout Labeling
14015 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14022 This is text with Strikeout on.
14028 arg "font-strikeout"
14032 \begin_inset Newline newline
14035 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has since
14039 \begin_layout Labeling
14040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14047 This is text with Noun on.
14054 , this is a logical attribute.
14055 Normally it's equivalent to
14058 \begin_inset space ~
14067 \begin_layout Labeling
14068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14073 You can adjust the color of the text with this control.
14074 Notice that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14078 \begin_inset space ~
14083 , which is the default
14084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14091 and means normally black, you can choose between
14124 \begin_inset Index idx
14127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14136 \begin_layout Labeling
14137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14142 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14143 the language of the document.
14144 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14145 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14147 \begin_inset Newline newline
14150 If you have for example a longer German Text in your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
14152 the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14153 When using the spell checking (see section
14154 \begin_inset space ~
14158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14160 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14164 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary
14167 \begin_layout Standard
14168 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14169 Once you've chosen a new character style via the
14171 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14173 \begin_inset space ~
14178 dialog, the settings are saved.
14179 You can activate them using the toolbar button
14182 arg "textstyle-apply"
14186 The button lets you toggle the state of your custom character style even
14187 when the dialog isn't visible.
14191 \begin_layout Standard
14192 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14199 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14200 (suppose you just set the shape to
14201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14219 \begin_inset space ~
14231 \begin_layout Standard
14232 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14240 \begin_inset space ~
14252 \begin_layout Itemize
14258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14265 font, that means every character has the same width, the
14266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14283 \begin_inset Newline newline
14287 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14301 \begin_inset Note Note
14304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14305 For more on phantoms see section
14306 \begin_inset space ~
14310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14312 reference "subsec:More-Spaces"
14322 \begin_inset Newline newline
14328 \begin_layout Itemize
14333 fonts use characters with serifs.
14334 These are the small
14335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14342 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14343 The following example will show the difference:
14344 \begin_inset Newline newline
14348 \begin_inset Newline newline
14353 text without serifs
14356 \begin_inset Newline newline
14359 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14360 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14367 \begin_layout Itemize
14373 This font type is therefore often used for headings and short texts.
14374 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14377 \begin_layout Standard
14378 We conclude with the same warning once again: Don't overuse the fonts.
14379 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14382 \begin_layout Section
14383 Printing and Previewing
14386 \begin_layout Subsection
14390 \begin_layout Standard
14391 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14392 using \SpecialChar LyX
14393 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14394 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14395 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14396 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14398 Additional Features
14403 \begin_layout Standard
14405 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
14408 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
14409 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
14410 we'll only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
14413 is what you use to do your actual writing.
14414 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
14415 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
14416 to turn your writing into printable output.
14417 This happens in two stages:
14420 \begin_layout Enumerate
14421 First, \SpecialChar LyX
14422 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
14424 a file with the extension,
14425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14439 \begin_layout Enumerate
14440 Next, \SpecialChar LaTeX
14441 uses the commands in the
14445 file to produce printable output.
14449 \begin_layout Subsection
14450 Output file formats
14451 \begin_inset Index idx
14454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14463 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
14470 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14472 \begin_inset Index idx
14475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14476 File formats ! ASCII
14484 \begin_layout Standard
14485 This file type has the extension
14486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14498 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14502 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14509 \begin_layout Standard
14510 You can export your document to ASCII by the menu
14512 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14513 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14522 \begin_inset Index idx
14525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14526 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
14535 \begin_layout Standard
14536 This file type has the extension
14537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14548 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14551 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
14552 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
14553 -Errors or to process it manually
14554 with console commands.
14555 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
14556 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
14557 's temporary directory whenever you
14558 view or export your document.
14561 \begin_layout Standard
14562 You can export your document as \SpecialChar LaTeX
14563 -file using the menu
14565 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14566 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14583 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14585 \begin_inset Index idx
14588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14597 \begin_layout Standard
14598 This file type has the extension
14599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14619 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14620 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14621 DVIs are used for quick previews and as pre-stage for other output formats,
14625 \begin_layout Standard
14626 DVI files do not contain images, they only link them.
14627 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14628 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the image in the background to make
14629 it visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer when
14631 So we recommend to use PDF for files with many images.
14634 \begin_layout Standard
14635 You can export your document to DVI by the menu
14637 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14638 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14644 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14646 \begin_inset Index idx
14649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14650 File formats ! PostScript
14658 \begin_layout Standard
14659 This file type has the extension
14660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14672 PostScript was developed by the company
14676 as a printer language.
14677 The file contains therefore commands that the printer uses to print the
14679 PostScript can be seen as a
14680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14683 programming language
14684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14687 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14692 When you are interested to learn more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14699 \begin_inset Index idx
14702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14704 -packages ! pstricks
14714 Due to this ability, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14717 \begin_layout Standard
14718 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14722 Encapsulated PostScript
14723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14726 (EPS, file extension
14727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14739 As \SpecialChar LyX
14740 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
14741 convert them in the background to EPS.
14743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14746 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
14748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14751 conversions whenever you view or export your document.
14752 This will slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
14754 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14755 EPS to avoid this problem.
14758 \begin_layout Standard
14759 You can export your document to PostScript using the menu
14761 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14762 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14770 \begin_inset Index idx
14773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14780 \begin_inset Index idx
14783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14792 \begin_layout Standard
14793 This file type has the extension
14794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14810 Portable Document Format
14811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14818 was derived from PostScript.
14819 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14828 implies, it can be processed at any computer system and the printed output
14829 looks exactly the same.
14832 \begin_layout Standard
14833 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14837 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14841 (JPG, file extension
14842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14869 Portable Network Graphics
14870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14873 (PNG, file extension
14874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14886 You can although use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
14888 the background to one of these formats.
14889 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14890 will slow down your workflow.
14891 So we recommend to use images in one of the three mentioned formats.
14894 \begin_layout Standard
14895 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14897 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14900 in three different ways:
14903 \begin_layout Description
14904 PDF This uses the program
14908 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14909 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14913 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14914 So this export variant consist of three conversions.
14917 \begin_layout Description
14919 \begin_inset space ~
14922 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14926 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14930 \begin_layout Description
14932 \begin_inset space ~
14935 (pdflatex) This uses the program pdftex that converts your file directly
14939 \begin_layout Description
14941 \begin_inset space ~
14948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14955 X) This uses the program Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14956 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14958 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for
14959 direct font access (see section
14960 \begin_inset space ~
14964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14966 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14971 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts.
14974 \begin_layout Description
14976 \begin_inset space ~
14983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14990 X) This uses the program Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14991 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14992 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14993 is an even newer engine, derived from pdflatex, that also provides
14994 direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
14995 \begin_inset space ~
14999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15001 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15006 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15007 is still work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15012 \begin_layout Standard
15013 We recommend to use
15016 \begin_inset space ~
15025 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15026 works without problems.
15031 is no longer under development and therefore a bit outdated.
15034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15036 \begin_inset Index idx
15039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15040 FileFormats ! XHTML
15046 \begin_inset Index idx
15049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15058 \begin_layout Standard
15059 This file type has the extension
15060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15072 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15073 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links them, and
15074 when \SpecialChar LyX
15075 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15076 suitable for the purpose.
15077 Math is output as MathML, which renders nicely in browsers that support
15078 it, but not all do.
15081 \begin_layout Standard
15082 XHTML output remains
15083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15090 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15091 features are supported yet.
15093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15097 and the World Wide Web
15098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15103 Additional Features
15105 manual, for more information.
15108 \begin_layout Standard
15109 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15111 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15112 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15119 \begin_layout Subsection
15121 \begin_inset Index idx
15124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15133 \begin_layout Standard
15136 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15137 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15146 or use the toolbar button
15153 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15154 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15161 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15165 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15173 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15178 Further output formats can be selected via
15180 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15181 View (Other Formats)
15183 or the toolbar button
15184 \begin_inset Graphics
15185 filename ../../images/view-others.svgz
15187 groupId toolbarbuttons
15194 \begin_layout Standard
15197 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15198 viewer window using the menu
15200 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15205 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15206 Update (Other Formats)
15211 \begin_layout Standard
15214 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
15217 To have a real output, export your document.
15220 \begin_layout Section
15221 A few Words about Typography
15222 \begin_inset Index idx
15225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15234 \begin_layout Subsection
15236 \begin_inset Index idx
15239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15248 \begin_layout Standard
15249 In \SpecialChar LyX
15251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15262 character comes in four lengths: the
15274 , and the minus sign:
15275 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15281 \begin_layout Standard
15282 \begin_inset Tabular
15283 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15284 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
15285 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15286 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15287 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15288 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15317 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15357 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15382 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15384 \begin_inset space ~
15387 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15394 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15421 \begin_inset space ~
15424 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15445 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15479 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15485 \begin_layout Standard
15486 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15498 character multiple times in a row.
15499 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15500 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
15503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15533 \begin_layout Standard
15534 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15535 math mode and has a length of its own.
15536 Here are some examples of the
15537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15551 \begin_layout Enumerate
15552 line- and page-breaks
15553 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15563 \begin_layout Enumerate
15565 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15575 \begin_layout Enumerate
15576 Oh — there's a dash.
15577 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15587 \begin_layout Enumerate
15588 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15592 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15602 \begin_layout Subsection
15604 \begin_inset Index idx
15607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15616 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
15623 \begin_layout Standard
15624 Words aren't hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
15625 but automatically in the output.
15626 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15632 \begin_inset Index idx
15635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15642 following the rules of the document language
15646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15647 For German readers: That's one of the main differences between the languages
15655 \begin_inset space ~
15659 \begin_inset space ~
15666 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15677 \begin_layout Standard
15679 hyphenates almost perfectly, it only has problems with text in the
15683 font and with unusual constructs, like
15684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15692 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
15693 can't break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
15694 This is done with the menu
15696 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15697 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15699 \begin_inset space ~
15705 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15707 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
15711 \begin_layout Standard
15712 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15713 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15724 would then see the hyphen
15725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15732 as a hyphenation possibility.
15733 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15734 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15735 as described in section
15736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15739 Prevent Hyphenation
15740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15750 \begin_layout Subsection
15752 \begin_inset Index idx
15755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15765 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15768 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
15775 \begin_layout Standard
15776 When \SpecialChar LyX
15777 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15778 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
15780 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15786 appropriate amount of space
15787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15791 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15793 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period as a word uses.
15796 \begin_layout Standard
15797 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15798 not work in all cases.
15800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15811 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15812 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15815 \begin_layout Standard
15816 Here are some examples of
15820 abbreviations and the end of a sentence:
15823 \begin_layout Itemize
15828 \begin_layout Itemize
15833 \begin_layout Standard
15834 And here's an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15837 \begin_layout Itemize
15839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15843 this is too much space!
15846 \begin_layout Itemize
15851 \begin_layout Standard
15852 You won't see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15855 \begin_layout Standard
15856 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15859 \begin_layout Enumerate
15863 \begin_inset space ~
15868 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15869 \begin_inset space ~
15873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15875 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
15880 \begin_inset Index idx
15883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15884 Spaces ! inter-word
15892 \begin_layout Enumerate
15896 \begin_inset space ~
15901 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15902 \begin_inset space ~
15906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15908 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
15913 \begin_inset Index idx
15916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15925 \begin_layout Enumerate
15929 \begin_inset space ~
15933 \begin_inset space ~
15937 \begin_inset space ~
15944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15946 \begin_inset space ~
15951 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
15952 This function is also bound to
15955 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
15961 \begin_layout Standard
15962 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
15965 \begin_layout Itemize
15967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15971 \begin_inset space \space{}
15974 this is too much space!
15977 \begin_layout Itemize
15978 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
15982 \begin_layout Standard
15983 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
15984 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
15986 will take care of this.
15989 \begin_layout Standard
15990 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
15994 \begin_inset space ~
16000 feature described in section
16002 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16007 Additional Features
16012 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16014 \begin_inset Index idx
16017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16018 Typography ! Quotes
16024 \begin_inset Index idx
16027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16058 \begin_layout Standard
16060 usually sets quotes correctly.
16061 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16062 and use a closing quote at the end.
16064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16072 The keyboard character,
16076 , generates this automatically.
16079 \begin_layout Standard
16080 You can change the behavior of the
16084 key using the submenu
16090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16094 \begin_inset Index idx
16097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16098 Document ! Settings
16106 \begin_layout Standard
16107 You can also select quotes for different languages in the box
16112 There are six choices:
16115 \begin_layout Labeling
16116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16128 Use quotes like this
16129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16137 \begin_inset Quotes els
16141 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16147 \begin_layout Labeling
16148 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16151 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16155 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16161 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16165 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16169 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16175 \begin_layout Labeling
16176 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16179 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16183 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16189 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16193 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16197 \begin_inset Quotes gls
16201 \begin_inset Quotes grs
16207 \begin_layout Labeling
16208 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16211 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16215 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16221 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16225 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16229 \begin_inset Quotes pls
16233 \begin_inset Quotes prs
16239 \begin_layout Labeling
16240 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16243 \begin_inset Quotes cld
16247 \begin_inset Quotes crd
16253 \begin_inset Quotes cld
16257 \begin_inset Quotes crd
16261 \begin_inset Quotes cls
16265 \begin_inset Quotes crs
16271 \begin_layout Labeling
16272 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16275 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16279 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16285 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16289 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16293 \begin_inset Quotes als
16297 \begin_inset Quotes ars
16303 \begin_layout Standard
16304 These settings affect what character the
16311 \begin_layout Subsection
16313 \begin_inset Index idx
16316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16317 Typography ! Ligatures
16323 \begin_inset Index idx
16326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16357 name "subsec:Ligatures"
16364 \begin_layout Standard
16365 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16366 print them as single characters.
16367 These groups are known as
16372 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
16373 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
16375 Here are the standard ligatures:
16378 \begin_layout Itemize
16382 \begin_layout Itemize
16386 \begin_layout Itemize
16390 \begin_layout Itemize
16394 \begin_layout Itemize
16398 \begin_layout Standard
16399 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16402 \begin_layout Standard
16403 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16404 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16412 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16428 To break a ligature, use
16430 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16431 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16433 \begin_inset space ~
16440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16451 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
16453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16468 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
16470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16476 \begin_layout Subsection
16478 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
16480 \begin_inset Index idx
16483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16495 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16502 \begin_layout Standard
16505 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16509 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
16512 \begin_layout Description
16514 The name of the game.
16517 \begin_layout Description
16519 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
16523 \begin_layout Description
16525 The \SpecialChar TeX
16526 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
16530 \begin_layout Description
16531 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
16532 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
16536 \begin_layout Standard
16537 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16543 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16551 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
16552 world to give programs geek version numbers.
16553 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
16554 converges to the number
16555 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16558 : The actual version is
16559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16567 , the previous one was
16568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16579 \begin_layout Subsection
16581 \begin_inset Index idx
16584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16593 \begin_layout Standard
16594 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16595 space between two words.
16596 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16606 for units use the menu
16608 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16609 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16611 \begin_inset space ~
16619 arg "space-insert thin"
16625 \begin_layout Standard
16626 Here's an example to show the differences:
16629 \begin_layout Standard
16630 \begin_inset Tabular
16631 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16632 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16633 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16634 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16641 \begin_inset space ~
16645 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16657 space between number and unit
16664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16673 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16685 half space between number and unit
16698 \begin_layout Subsection
16700 \begin_inset Index idx
16703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16704 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16712 \begin_layout Standard
16713 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16715 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16716 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16717 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16718 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16719 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16720 These bits of text became known as
16731 \begin_layout Standard
16732 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
16733 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16734 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16735 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16736 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16737 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
16738 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there to
16739 specifically prevent widows and orphans.
16740 This is the advantage \SpecialChar LyX
16741 has in using \SpecialChar LaTeX
16745 \begin_layout Standard
16746 There's no way we can go into how \SpecialChar TeX
16747 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
16748 decide to break a page, or how you
16749 can tweak that behavior.
16750 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
16751 books listed in the bibliography [such as
16752 \begin_inset space ~
16756 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16758 key "latexcompanion"
16764 \begin_inset space ~
16768 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16775 ] may have more information.
16776 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16779 \begin_layout Chapter
16780 Notes, Graphics, Tables, and Floats
16781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16783 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16790 \begin_layout Standard
16791 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16796 There you'll also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16799 \begin_layout Section
16801 \begin_inset Index idx
16804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16820 \begin_layout Standard
16822 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16825 \begin_layout Description
16828 \begin_inset space ~
16831 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16832 \begin_inset Newline newline
16836 \begin_inset Note Note
16839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16840 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
16848 \begin_layout Description
16849 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it appears as \SpecialChar LaTeX
16851 when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16854 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16855 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16858 \begin_inset space ~
16864 \begin_inset Newline newline
16868 \begin_inset Note Comment
16871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16872 This is text in a note box that only appears as comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
16881 \begin_layout Description
16883 \begin_inset space ~
16886 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
16887 set in the document settings under
16889 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
16891 \begin_inset space ~
16897 \begin_inset Newline newline
16901 \begin_inset Newline newline
16905 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16914 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
16915 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
16920 of a comment that appears in the output.
16926 \begin_inset Newline newline
16930 \begin_inset Newline newline
16933 As you can see in the example, the first line of greyed out notes is a bit
16934 indented and greyed out notes can have footnotes.
16937 \begin_layout Standard
16938 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
16946 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16950 Right-click on the appearing note box to select the note type.
16953 \begin_layout Section
16955 \begin_inset Index idx
16958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16967 name "sec:Footnotes"
16974 \begin_layout Standard
16976 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
16979 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16982 or the toolbar button
16985 arg "footnote-insert"
16997 \begin_inset Graphics
16998 filename ../clipart/footnote.png
17007 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17008 's representation of your footnote.
17018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17037 label, the box will
17041 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17042 Clicking on the box label again, will close
17055 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply mark it and click
17071 \begin_layout Standard
17072 Here is an example footnote:
17080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17081 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17089 \begin_layout Standard
17090 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17091 position where the footnote box is placed.
17092 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17093 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17095 The numbers are consecutive, no matter in which chapter the footnote is
17098 doesn't support other numbering schemes yet, but you can get other schemes
17099 using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17105 ey are described in the
17112 \begin_layout Section
17114 \begin_inset Index idx
17117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17126 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17133 \begin_layout Standard
17134 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17136 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17140 \begin_inset space ~
17145 or the toolbar button
17148 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17151 , you will see a box with the label
17152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17159 appearing within your text.
17160 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17161 's representation of your marginal note.
17164 \begin_layout Standard
17165 At the side is an example marginal note.
17166 \begin_inset Marginal
17169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17170 This is a marginal note.
17178 \begin_layout Standard
17179 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17180 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17181 pages, right on odd pages.
17184 \begin_layout Standard
17185 For further information about marginal notes see section
17188 \begin_inset space ~
17196 \begin_inset space ~
17204 \begin_layout Section
17205 Graphics and Images
17206 \begin_inset Index idx
17209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17216 \begin_inset Index idx
17219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17228 name "sec:Graphics"
17235 \begin_layout Standard
17236 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17237 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17240 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17249 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17252 \begin_layout Standard
17253 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17258 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17259 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17261 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17262 \begin_inset space ~
17266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17268 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
17275 \begin_layout Standard
17280 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17281 of the image in the output.
17282 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17286 \begin_inset space ~
17290 \begin_inset space ~
17299 \begin_inset space ~
17303 \begin_inset space ~
17307 \begin_inset space ~
17312 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17313 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17321 \begin_layout Standard
17325 and \SpecialChar LyX
17328 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
17329 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
17331 You can also specify here the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
17336 \begin_inset space ~
17341 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17342 with the image size is printed.
17345 \begin_layout Standard
17346 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17347 The image will appear in the output exactly at the position where it is
17349 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17351 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
17357 \begin_layout Standard
17359 \begin_inset Graphics
17360 filename ../clipart/mobius.eps
17362 rotateOrigin center
17369 \begin_layout Standard
17370 If you need image captions and want to reference images, you have to put
17371 the image into a float, see section
17372 \begin_inset space ~
17376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17378 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
17385 \begin_layout Subsection
17387 \begin_inset Index idx
17390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17399 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
17406 \begin_layout Standard
17407 You can insert images in any known file format.
17408 But as we explained in section
17409 \begin_inset space ~
17413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17415 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17419 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17421 uses therefore the program
17425 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17426 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17427 you can use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17428 \begin_inset space ~
17432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17434 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17441 \begin_layout Standard
17442 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17445 \begin_layout Description
17447 \begin_inset space ~
17450 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17451 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17452 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17456 Graphics Interchange Format
17457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17460 (GIF, file extension
17461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17473 \begin_inset Index idx
17476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17508 Portable Network Graphics
17509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17512 (PNG, file extension
17513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17525 \begin_inset Index idx
17528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17560 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17564 (JPG, file extension
17565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17589 \begin_inset Index idx
17592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17623 \begin_layout Description
17625 \begin_inset space ~
17628 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17630 The scaling ability is necessary if you want to create presentations, because
17631 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17632 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17633 \begin_inset Newline newline
17636 Scalable image formats can be
17637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17640 Scalable Vector Graphics
17641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17644 (SVG, file extension
17645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17657 \begin_inset Index idx
17660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17692 Encapsulated PostScript
17693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17696 (EPS, file extension
17697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17709 \begin_inset Index idx
17712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17744 Portable Document Format
17745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17748 (PDF, file extension
17749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17761 \begin_inset Index idx
17764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17771 We say it can be, because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF
17772 or EPS and the result won't be scalable.
17773 In this cases only a header with the image properties is added to the original
17778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17779 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
17787 \begin_layout Standard
17788 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only vice
17792 \begin_layout Subsection
17793 Grouping of Image Settings
17794 \begin_inset Index idx
17797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17798 Images ! Settings grouping
17806 \begin_layout Standard
17807 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
17809 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
17810 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
17812 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
17813 need to manually change each of them.
17817 \begin_layout Standard
17818 A new group can be set by entering a name in the
17821 \begin_inset space ~
17826 field in the Graphics dialog.
17827 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
17828 by checking the name of the desired group.
17831 \begin_layout Section
17833 \begin_inset Index idx
17836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17852 \begin_layout Standard
17853 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
17856 arg "tabular-insert"
17861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17865 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
17866 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
17867 from the rest of the table.
17868 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
17869 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
17871 Here's an example table:
17872 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
17878 \begin_layout Standard
17880 \begin_inset Tabular
17881 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
17882 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17883 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17884 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17885 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
17886 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
17927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
17974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18086 \begin_layout Subsection
18090 \begin_layout Standard
18091 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button, which
18092 brings up the table dialog.
18093 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell and row/column respectively
18094 where the cursor is placed currently.
18095 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18096 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18097 done on all of your selection.
18100 \begin_layout Standard
18101 Additionally to the table dialog, the
18104 \begin_inset space ~
18109 helps you in setting table properties.
18110 It appears when the cursor is inside a table.
18113 \begin_layout Standard
18117 \begin_inset space ~
18122 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18123 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18124 current cell respectively.
18125 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18127 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18128 of text, see section
18129 \begin_inset space ~
18133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18135 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18142 \begin_layout Standard
18143 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18144 using the check box
18153 This will merge the cells to
18157 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18158 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18159 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18160 Here's an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18161 in the last row without the upper border:
18162 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
18168 \begin_layout Standard
18170 \begin_inset Tabular
18171 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18172 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18173 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18174 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18175 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18187 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18196 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18272 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18307 \begin_layout Standard
18308 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18309 -arguments for the table.
18310 They are necessary for special table formatting, like for multirow cells,
18311 explained in the tables section of the
18314 \begin_inset space ~
18320 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18324 degrees counterclockwise.
18325 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
18329 \begin_layout Standard
18330 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18338 Most DVI-viewers are
18342 able to display rotations.
18350 \begin_layout Standard
18355 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18360 adds lines for all cell borders.
18363 \begin_layout Subsection
18365 \begin_inset Index idx
18368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18369 Tables ! Longtables
18375 \begin_inset Index idx
18378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18387 \begin_layout Standard
18388 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18391 \begin_inset space ~
18395 \begin_inset space ~
18404 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18405 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18408 \begin_layout Description
18413 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18414 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable;
18415 except for the first page, if
18418 \begin_inset space ~
18426 \begin_layout Description
18430 \begin_inset space ~
18435 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18436 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18439 \begin_layout Description
18444 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18445 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable;
18446 except for the last page, if
18449 \begin_inset space ~
18457 \begin_layout Description
18461 \begin_inset space ~
18466 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18467 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18470 \begin_layout Description
18471 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18472 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18474 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18478 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18481 \begin_inset space ~
18489 \begin_layout Standard
18490 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18491 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18492 of the fact that only the first one is used in the given table row.
18493 The others will then be defined as
18498 In this context, first means first in this order:
18501 \begin_inset space ~
18513 \begin_inset space ~
18519 See the following longtable to see how it works:
18520 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
18526 \begin_layout Standard
18528 \begin_inset Tabular
18529 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18530 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18531 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18532 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18533 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18534 <row endfirsthead="true">
18535 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18541 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18546 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18555 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18565 <row endfirsthead="true">
18566 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18577 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18586 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18598 <row endhead="true">
18599 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18610 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18619 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18629 <row endhead="true">
18630 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18641 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18650 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18662 <row endfoot="true">
18663 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18674 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18683 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19655 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19664 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19673 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19684 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19715 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19746 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19777 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19808 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19839 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19901 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19932 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19963 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19994 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20025 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20056 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20087 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20118 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20149 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20180 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20211 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20242 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20273 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20304 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20335 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20366 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20397 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20428 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20459 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20490 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20521 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20552 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20583 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20614 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20644 <row endlastfoot="true">
20645 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20656 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20665 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20682 \begin_layout Subsection
20684 \begin_inset Index idx
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20696 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
20703 \begin_layout Standard
20704 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20705 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20706 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20707 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20711 , etc.), nor set spacing options etc.
20712 for the cell's paragraph.
20715 \begin_layout Standard
20716 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20717 for the column in the table dialog.
20718 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20719 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20721 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
20727 \begin_layout Standard
20729 \begin_inset Tabular
20730 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20731 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20732 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20733 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
20734 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20823 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
20828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20879 This is longer now.
20884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20935 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
20936 This is longer now.
20941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 \begin_layout Standard
20968 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
20969 You can cut and paste even more than one row.
20973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 Note, that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would
20975 not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
20981 Selection with the mouse or with
20985 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
20986 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
20987 the selection from outside the table.
20990 \begin_layout Section
20992 \begin_inset Index idx
20995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21011 \begin_layout Subsection
21015 \begin_layout Standard
21016 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21017 have a fixed location.
21019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21026 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21034 \begin_inset space ~
21039 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21040 too many notes on the page.
21043 \begin_layout Standard
21044 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21045 Images and tables can be spread evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21046 and pages without text.
21047 As the floating often destroys the context between the text and the image/table
21048 , every float can be referenced in the text.
21049 Floats are therefore numbered.
21050 Referencing is described in section
21051 \begin_inset space ~
21055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21057 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21064 \begin_layout Standard
21065 To insert a float, use the menu
21067 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21071 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21072 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21074 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21075 \begin_inset Index idx
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21086 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21087 paragraph within the float.
21088 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21089 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21090 left-clicking on the box label.
21091 A closed float box looks like this:
21092 \begin_inset Graphics
21093 filename ../clipart/float.png
21098 – a gray button with a red label.
21101 \begin_layout Standard
21102 It is recommended to insert floats as a separate paragraph to avoid possible
21104 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21107 \begin_layout Subsection
21111 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21115 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21120 \begin_inset Index idx
21123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21126 Floats ! Figure floats
21134 \begin_layout Standard
21136 \begin_inset space ~
21140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21142 reference "cap:Platypus"
21146 was created using the menu
21148 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21149 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21152 or the toolbar button
21155 arg "float-insert figure"
21159 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21162 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21165 or the toolbar button
21168 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21172 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21173 in front of or behind the image and using the menu
21175 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21177 \begin_inset space ~
21182 or the toolbar button
21185 arg "layout-paragraph"
21191 \begin_layout Standard
21192 \begin_inset Float figure
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21199 \begin_inset Graphics
21200 filename ../clipart/platypus.eps
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21215 name "cap:Platypus"
21219 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21232 \begin_layout Standard
21233 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21235 As described in section
21236 \begin_inset space ~
21240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21242 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21246 , you can simply insert a label in the caption using the menu
21248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21251 or the toolbar button
21257 and refer to it using the menu
21259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21262 or the toolbar button
21265 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21269 It is important to use references to figure floats, rather than using vague
21271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21278 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
21279 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
21281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21291 \begin_layout Standard
21292 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21293 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21294 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21295 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21296 as described in section
21297 \begin_inset space ~
21301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21303 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
21309 \begin_inset space ~
21313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21315 reference "cap:Two-distorted-images"
21319 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21320 You can also set the images one below the other.
21322 \begin_inset space ~
21326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21328 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21335 reference "fig:Platypus"
21339 are the subfigures.
21342 \begin_layout Standard
21343 \begin_inset Float figure
21348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21349 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21353 \begin_inset Float figure
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21366 name "fig:Undefinable"
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 \begin_inset Graphics
21380 filename ../clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21391 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21395 \begin_inset Float figure
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21408 name "fig:Platypus"
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 \begin_inset Graphics
21422 filename ../clipart/platypus.eps
21434 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21446 name "cap:Two-distorted-images"
21450 Two distorted images.
21463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21465 \begin_inset Index idx
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21471 Floats ! Table floats
21479 \begin_layout Standard
21480 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21482 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21483 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21486 or the toolbar botton
21489 arg "float-insert table"
21493 They have the same properties as figure floats except for the different
21496 \begin_inset space ~
21500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21502 reference "cap:Table-float"
21509 \begin_layout Standard
21510 \begin_inset Float table
21515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21516 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21521 name "cap:Table-float"
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21535 \begin_inset Tabular
21536 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21537 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21538 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21539 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21540 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21604 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21616 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21619 \end{array}\right]$
21627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21631 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21652 \begin_layout Subsection
21654 \begin_inset Index idx
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21668 \begin_layout Standard
21670 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
21671 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
21672 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
21674 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in chapter
21682 \begin_inset space ~
21690 \begin_layout Section
21692 \begin_inset Index idx
21695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21704 name "sec:Minipages"
21711 \begin_layout Standard
21713 provides a mechanism to produce essentially a page within a page, called
21715 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
21716 \begin_inset space ~
21723 \begin_layout Standard
21724 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
21725 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
21727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21731 Right-clicking on the box allows you to alter the width of the minipage
21732 and its alignment within the page.
21733 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
21739 \begin_layout Standard
21741 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21751 height_special "totalheight"
21756 backgroundcolor "none"
21759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21762 This is a minipage.
21763 The text is set in an italic style.
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21769 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
21770 another formatting.
21778 \begin_layout Standard
21779 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21782 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
21786 as described in section
21787 \begin_inset space ~
21791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21793 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
21798 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21804 \begin_layout Standard
21805 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21815 height_special "totalheight"
21820 backgroundcolor "none"
21823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21824 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21825 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21831 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21835 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21845 height_special "totalheight"
21850 backgroundcolor "none"
21853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21854 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21855 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21863 \begin_layout Standard
21864 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
21870 \begin_layout Standard
21871 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can change the box from a minipage
21872 to other box types.
21873 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
21884 \begin_layout Chapter
21885 Mathematical Formulas
21886 \begin_inset Index idx
21889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21896 \begin_inset Index idx
21899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21930 name "cha:Mathematical-Formulas"
21937 \begin_layout Standard
21938 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21943 There you'll also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21946 \begin_layout Section
21948 \begin_inset Index idx
21951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21960 \begin_layout Standard
21961 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
21968 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
21970 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
21971 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
21972 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
21974 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21980 \begin_layout Standard
21981 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
21985 \begin_inset space ~
21990 , that appears when the cursor is in a formula.
21993 \begin_layout Standard
21994 There are two main types of formulas: Inline formulas appear within a text
21995 line, like this one:
21998 \begin_layout Standard
21999 This is a line with an inline formula
22000 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22006 \begin_layout Standard
22007 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in an own paragraph
22009 \begin_inset Formula
22016 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22019 \begin_layout Standard
22021 supports also many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22028 \begin_inset space \space{}
22032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22045 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22046 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22050 So typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22053 \begin_inset space ~
22061 \begin_layout Subsection
22062 Navigating in Formulas
22063 \begin_inset Index idx
22066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22075 \begin_layout Standard
22076 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22077 achieved with the arrow keys.
22079 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22080 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22085 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22086 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22090 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22094 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22097 \end{array}\right]$
22105 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22110 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22111 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22114 \begin_layout Standard
22119 , printed in this document as
22120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22141 \begin_inset Note Note
22144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22145 This command will appear in the output as official character denoting the
22146 space character (visible space).
22151 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22152 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22153 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22158 For example, if you want
22159 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22213 , since in the latter case only the
22216 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22221 will be under the square root sign:
22222 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22228 \begin_layout Standard
22229 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22231 \begin_inset Formula
22233 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22242 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22243 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22246 \begin_layout Subsection
22250 \begin_layout Standard
22251 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22252 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22256 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22257 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22258 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22259 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22260 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
22264 \begin_layout Subsection
22265 Exponents and Subscripts
22266 \begin_inset Index idx
22269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22276 \begin_inset Index idx
22279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22288 \begin_layout Standard
22289 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22292 arg "math-superscript"
22298 arg "math-subscript"
22301 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22303 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22306 , type in a formula
22309 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22319 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22325 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22329 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22335 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22341 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22350 , you have to use an extra
22354 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22355 For example, if you want
22356 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22362 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22368 Subscripts are similar: To get
22369 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22375 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22383 \begin_layout Subsection
22385 \begin_inset Index idx
22388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22397 \begin_layout Standard
22398 Create a fraction with either the command
22407 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22413 \begin_inset space ~
22419 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22420 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22421 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22426 To move back up, press
22431 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22432 \begin_inset Formula
22434 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22437 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22445 \begin_layout Subsection
22447 \begin_inset Index idx
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22459 \begin_layout Standard
22460 Roots can be created using the
22463 \begin_inset space ~
22471 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22477 arg "math-insert \\root"
22499 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22505 always produces a square root.
22508 \begin_layout Subsection
22509 Operators with Limits
22510 \begin_inset Index idx
22513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22522 \begin_inset Index idx
22525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22536 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
22543 \begin_layout Standard
22545 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22549 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22552 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22553 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
22554 by entering them as you would enter a super-
22555 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22556 The sum operator will automatically place its
22557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22564 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
22566 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22570 \begin_inset Formula
22572 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22577 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
22581 \begin_layout Standard
22582 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22584 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22585 behind the operator and using the menu
22587 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22588 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
22590 \begin_inset space ~
22594 \begin_inset space ~
22608 \begin_layout Standard
22609 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
22610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22618 \begin_inset Index idx
22621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22630 \begin_inset Formula
22632 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22637 which will place the
22638 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22650 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22651 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22657 \begin_layout Standard
22658 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22665 Have a look at section
22666 \begin_inset space ~
22670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22672 reference "subsec:Functions"
22676 for an explanation of function macros.
22679 \begin_layout Subsection
22681 \begin_inset Index idx
22684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22695 \begin_layout Standard
22696 Most math symbols can be found in the
22699 \begin_inset space ~
22704 under one of several categories; including
22721 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
22725 \begin_layout Standard
22726 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22727 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
22728 don't have to use the
22731 \begin_inset space ~
22736 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
22738 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
22741 \begin_layout Subsection
22743 \begin_inset Index idx
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22757 \begin_layout Standard
22758 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
22764 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
22770 \begin_inset space ~
22778 arg "math-insert \\space"
22782 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
22783 For example, the sequence
22788 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
22791 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
22793 \begin_inset Graphics
22794 filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png
22799 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
22800 the space marker and enter space again several times.
22801 With every space enter the size will be changed.
22802 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
22803 , because they are negative
22805 Here are two examples:
22808 \begin_layout Standard
22818 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
22824 \begin_layout Standard
22834 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
22840 \begin_layout Subsection
22842 \begin_inset Index idx
22845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22856 name "subsec:Functions"
22863 \begin_layout Standard
22867 \begin_inset space ~
22872 contains under the button
22875 arg "math-insert \\functions"
22878 a number of function macros, such as
22879 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
22883 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
22891 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
22898 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
22899 avoid confusions, because
22900 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
22904 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
22910 \begin_layout Standard
22911 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
22913 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
22917 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
22923 \begin_layout Standard
22924 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
22925 are placed, as described in section
22926 \begin_inset space ~
22930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22932 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
22939 \begin_layout Subsection
22941 \begin_inset Index idx
22944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22955 \begin_layout Standard
22956 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
22958 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
22959 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
22960 commands, for example, to enter
22961 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
22964 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
22965 Our example is entered by typing
22970 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22977 \begin_inset space ~
22981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22983 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
22987 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
22990 \begin_layout Standard
22991 \begin_inset Float table
22996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22997 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23004 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23008 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23018 \begin_inset Tabular
23019 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23020 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23021 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23022 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23023 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23080 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23116 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23152 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23188 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23224 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23260 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23332 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23368 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23404 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23425 \begin_layout Standard
23426 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23429 \begin_inset space ~
23437 arg "math-insert \\hat"
23440 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23444 \begin_layout Section
23445 Brackets and Delimiters
23446 \begin_inset Index idx
23449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23458 \begin_inset Index idx
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23472 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23479 \begin_layout Standard
23480 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
23482 For some purposes, using just the keys
23487 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23488 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23489 toolbar delimiter icon
23492 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23496 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
23497 \begin_inset Formula
23499 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
23507 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
23508 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
23512 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23515 and the expression on the right was entered using the
23521 \begin_inset Formula
23523 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
23531 \begin_layout Standard
23532 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
23533 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
23537 \begin_layout Standard
23538 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
23539 left side and right side.
23540 If you use the option
23543 \begin_inset space ~
23548 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
23549 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
23551 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
23556 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
23557 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
23560 \begin_layout Standard
23561 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
23562 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
23563 is to go inside the brackets.
23564 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
23569 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
23570 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
23571 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
23575 arg "math-delim ( )"
23581 \begin_layout Section
23582 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
23583 \begin_inset Index idx
23586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23595 \begin_inset Index idx
23598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23607 \begin_inset Index idx
23610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23613 Math ! Multi-line Equations
23621 \begin_layout Standard
23622 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23626 \begin_inset space ~
23634 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
23638 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
23639 Here is an example:
23640 \begin_inset Formula
23642 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23651 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
23652 \begin_inset space ~
23656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23658 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23663 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
23664 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
23665 This alignment is set in the box
23670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23719 for every column as default.
23720 For example, the sequence
23721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23732 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
23733 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
23734 corresponds to the relevant column.
23735 The result will look like this:
23736 \begin_inset Formula
23739 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
23740 column & has & has\,right\\
23741 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
23750 \begin_layout Standard
23751 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
23754 arg "newline-insert newline"
23757 while the cursor is in the matrix.
23758 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
23760 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23763 or the math toolbar.
23766 \begin_layout Standard
23767 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
23768 It can be created with the menu
23770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23771 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23773 \begin_inset space ~
23785 Here is an example:
23786 \begin_inset Formula
23800 \begin_layout Standard
23801 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23804 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
23807 arg "newline-insert newline"
23811 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
23816 arg "newline-insert newline"
23819 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
23820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23827 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
23828 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
23829 A new row is created by every further entry of
23832 arg "newline-insert newline"
23836 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
23837 Here is an example:
23838 \begin_inset Formula
23840 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
23841 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
23846 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
23847 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
23848 \begin_inset Formula
23850 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
23858 \begin_layout Standard
23859 The multi-line formula type described here is called
23864 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
23865 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
23866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23868 reference "eq:asquared"
23873 The other types are described in section
23874 \begin_inset space ~
23878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23880 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
23887 \begin_layout Section
23888 Formula Numbering and Referencing
23889 \begin_inset Index idx
23892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23895 Math ! Formula numbering
23901 \begin_inset Index idx
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 Math ! Referencing formulas
23913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23915 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
23922 \begin_layout Standard
23923 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
23925 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23926 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23928 \begin_inset space ~
23932 \begin_inset space ~
23940 arg "math-number-toggle"
23944 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23945 within parentheses.
23946 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
23947 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
23948 the document class.
23949 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
23950 separated by a dot:
23951 \begin_inset Formula
23961 arg "math-number-toggle"
23964 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
23965 You can only number displayed formulas.
23968 \begin_layout Standard
23969 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
23971 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23972 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23974 \begin_inset space ~
23978 \begin_inset space ~
23986 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
23989 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
23990 \begin_inset Formula
23993 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
23999 To number all lines use the shortcut
24002 arg "math-number-toggle"
24008 \begin_layout Standard
24009 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24012 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24013 A label is inserted with the menu
24015 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24024 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24025 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24026 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24038 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24039 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24040 We inserted in the following example the label
24041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24048 in the second line:
24049 \begin_inset Formula
24051 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24052 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24057 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24058 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24059 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24063 \begin_inset space ~
24071 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24075 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24076 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24077 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24078 as the formula number:
24081 \begin_layout Standard
24082 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24085 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24092 \begin_layout Standard
24093 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
24094 's cross-reference box are described in section
24095 \begin_inset space ~
24099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24101 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24106 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24114 \begin_layout Section
24115 User defined math macros
24116 \begin_inset Index idx
24119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24130 \begin_layout Standard
24132 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24133 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24134 Math macros are explained in section
24137 \begin_inset space ~
24149 \begin_layout Section
24153 \begin_layout Subsection
24155 \begin_inset Index idx
24158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24169 \begin_layout Standard
24170 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24171 To set a font in a formula, use the
24174 \begin_inset space ~
24182 arg "math-insert \\font"
24185 , or enter its command, listed in table
24186 \begin_inset space ~
24190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24192 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24199 \begin_layout Standard
24200 \begin_inset Float table
24205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24206 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24213 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24217 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24227 \begin_inset Tabular
24228 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24229 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24230 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24231 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24257 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24284 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24311 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24338 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24365 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24392 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24421 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24448 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24482 \begin_layout Standard
24483 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24491 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
24507 \begin_layout Standard
24508 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
24509 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
24514 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
24515 space when you need a space in the box.
24516 Here is an example where
24517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24528 denotes the set of numbers:
24529 \begin_inset Formula
24531 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
24539 \begin_layout Standard
24540 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
24541 You can, for example, put a character in
24550 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
24554 \begin_inset Newline newline
24557 So it is better not to use this feature.
24560 \begin_layout Standard
24561 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
24562 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
24566 \begin_inset Newline newline
24569 You can only print them emboldened using the command
24575 , which works like the other typeface commands:
24576 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
24582 \begin_layout Standard
24589 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
24592 \begin_layout Standard
24593 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
24595 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24596 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24598 \begin_inset space ~
24606 \begin_layout Subsection
24608 \begin_inset Index idx
24611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24622 \begin_layout Standard
24623 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
24625 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
24629 \begin_inset space ~
24633 \begin_inset space ~
24641 \begin_inset space ~
24649 arg "math-insert \\font"
24653 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24654 in black instead of blue.
24655 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
24656 Here is an example:
24657 \begin_inset Formula
24660 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
24661 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
24670 \begin_layout Subsection
24672 \begin_inset Index idx
24675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24686 \begin_layout Standard
24687 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
24688 automatically chosen in most situations.
24706 For most characters,
24714 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
24715 and certain other structures, are set larger in
24720 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
24721 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
24722 thinks are appropriate.
24723 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
24726 arg "math-insert \\style"
24730 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
24731 For example, you can set
24732 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
24735 , which is normally in
24744 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
24748 The four styles are used in the following example:
24751 \begin_layout Standard
24752 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
24756 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
24760 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
24764 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
24770 \begin_layout Standard
24771 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
24772 is set in a particular size with the menu
24774 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24776 \begin_inset space ~
24781 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
24782 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
24783 will be adjusted to correspond.
24784 As an example here is a formula in the font size
24785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24795 \begin_layout Standard
24798 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
24804 \begin_layout Section
24805 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
24807 \begin_inset Index idx
24810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24819 \begin_inset Index idx
24822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24833 \begin_layout Standard
24835 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
24836 that are in common use.
24839 \begin_layout Subsection
24840 Enabling AMS-Support
24843 \begin_layout Standard
24844 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
24845 the document by selecting the checkbox
24848 \begin_inset space ~
24852 \begin_inset space ~
24856 \begin_inset space ~
24863 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
24867 \begin_inset Index idx
24870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24873 Document ! Settings
24881 \begin_inset space ~
24887 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
24888 -errors in formulas,
24889 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
24892 \begin_layout Subsection
24894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24896 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24901 \begin_inset Index idx
24904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24907 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24915 \begin_layout Standard
24916 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
24917 provides a selection of different formula types.
24919 allows you to choose between
24940 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
24941 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24948 , for an explanation of these formula types.
24951 \begin_layout Chapter
24955 \begin_layout Section
24957 \begin_inset Index idx
24960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24971 name "sec:Cross-References"
24978 \begin_layout Standard
24979 One of \SpecialChar LyX
24980 's strengths is cross-references.
24981 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
24983 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
24984 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
24985 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
24988 \begin_layout Enumerate
24992 \begin_layout Enumerate
24993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24995 name "enu:Second-item"
25002 \begin_layout Enumerate
25006 \begin_layout Standard
25007 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25009 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25012 or by pressing the toolbar button
25019 A gray label box like this:
25020 \begin_inset Graphics
25021 filename ../clipart/label.png
25026 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25028 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25063 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25064 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25080 \begin_layout Standard
25081 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25083 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25086 or the toolbar button
25089 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25093 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25094 \begin_inset Graphics
25095 filename ../clipart/reference.png
25100 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25102 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25115 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25119 \begin_layout Standard
25120 As an alternative to
25122 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25125 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25130 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25131 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25133 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25145 \begin_layout Standard
25146 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25147 \begin_inset space ~
25151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25153 reference "enu:Second-item"
25160 \begin_layout Standard
25161 It is recommended to use a protected space
25165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25166 described in section
25167 \begin_inset space ~
25171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25173 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
25182 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25183 line breaks between them.
25186 \begin_layout Standard
25187 There are six formats of cross-references:
25190 \begin_layout Description
25191 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25194 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25201 \begin_layout Description
25202 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25203 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25215 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25222 \begin_layout Description
25223 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25224 \begin_inset space ~
25228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25229 LatexCommand pageref
25230 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25237 \begin_layout Description
25239 \begin_inset space ~
25243 \begin_inset space ~
25246 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25248 LatexCommand vpageref
25249 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25254 \begin_inset Newline newline
25257 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25258 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25259 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25260 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25261 it prints “on the next page”.
25262 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25265 \begin_layout Description
25267 \begin_inset space ~
25271 \begin_inset space ~
25275 \begin_inset space ~
25278 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25281 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25286 \begin_inset Newline newline
25289 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25295 ; otherwise it behaves like
25299 \begin_inset space ~
25303 \begin_inset space ~
25312 \begin_layout Description
25314 \begin_inset space ~
25317 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25318 \begin_inset Newline newline
25322 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25330 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25340 \begin_inset Index idx
25343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25347 -packages ! prettyref
25353 \begin_inset Index idx
25356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25360 -packages ! refstyle
25371 \begin_inset Newline newline
25374 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
25375 -package should be used for this feature by setting
25378 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25382 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25383 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25391 is the default and preferred because
25395 supports only English documents.
25396 The format is specified by using the command
25408 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25409 preamble of the document.
25410 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25423 ) can be done with this command
25424 \begin_inset Newline newline
25431 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25436 \begin_inset Newline newline
25439 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25443 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25451 \begin_layout Description
25453 \begin_inset space ~
25456 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
25457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25458 LatexCommand nameref
25459 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25466 \begin_layout Standard
25467 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
25468 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
25470 The varieties are adjusted in the field
25474 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
25478 \begin_layout Standard
25479 You can only use the style
25483 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
25487 is always possible.
25490 \begin_layout Standard
25491 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
25492 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
25494 Referencing formulas is explained in section
25495 \begin_inset space ~
25499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25501 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25508 \begin_layout Standard
25509 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
25513 \begin_inset space ~
25517 \begin_inset space ~
25522 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
25523 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
25526 \begin_inset space ~
25531 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
25532 You can also go back with the toolbar button
25535 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
25541 \begin_layout Standard
25542 You can change labels at any time.
25543 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
25544 do not need to think about this.
25547 \begin_layout Standard
25548 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
25550 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
25554 \begin_layout Standard
25555 References are described in detail in the section
25556 \begin_inset space ~
25560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25570 \begin_inset space ~
25578 \begin_layout Section
25579 Table of Contents and other Listings
25580 \begin_inset Index idx
25583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25592 \begin_inset Index idx
25595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25613 \begin_layout Subsection
25615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25617 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
25624 \begin_layout Standard
25625 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
25627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25628 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
25630 \begin_inset space ~
25634 \begin_inset space ~
25640 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
25642 If you click on it, the
25646 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
25647 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
25648 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
25650 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
25652 \begin_inset space ~
25657 that is described in section
25658 \begin_inset space ~
25662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25664 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
25671 \begin_layout Standard
25672 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
25673 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
25675 \begin_inset space ~
25679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25681 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
25685 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
25687 \begin_inset space ~
25691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25693 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
25697 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
25699 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
25702 \begin_layout Subsection
25703 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
25704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25706 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25713 \begin_layout Standard
25714 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
25716 You can insert them via the
25718 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25722 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
25725 \begin_layout Section
25726 URLs and Hyperlinks
25727 \begin_inset Index idx
25730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25739 \begin_inset Index idx
25742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25753 \begin_layout Subsection
25755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25764 \begin_layout Standard
25765 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
25767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25773 \begin_layout Standard
25774 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
25776 \begin_inset Flex URL
25779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25789 \begin_layout Standard
25790 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
25796 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
25800 \begin_layout Standard
25801 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25809 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25818 \begin_layout Subsection
25820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25822 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
25829 \begin_layout Standard
25830 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
25832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25835 or with the toolbar button
25842 The appearing dialog has two fields:
25851 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
25852 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
25853 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25855 name "LyX's homepage"
25856 target "http://www.lyx.org"
25861 , an Email address like this:
25862 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25864 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
25865 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
25871 , or a link to a file.
25874 \begin_layout Standard
25875 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
25877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25888 to the link target.
25891 \begin_layout Standard
25892 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
25893 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
25894 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
25895 the text style dialog.
25896 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
25900 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25902 name "LyX's homepage"
25903 target "http://www.lyx.org"
25911 \begin_layout Standard
25912 The link text color can be changed, when the option
25916 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
25918 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25919 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25923 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
25925 \begin_inset Newline newline
25933 \begin_inset Newline newline
25940 in the PDF Properties dialog.
25943 \begin_layout Section
25945 \begin_inset Index idx
25948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25959 name "sec:Appendices"
25966 \begin_layout Standard
25967 Appendices are created with the menu
25969 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25971 \begin_inset space ~
25975 \begin_inset space ~
25981 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
25982 as the appendix part of the book.
25983 This part is marked with a red borderline.
25986 \begin_layout Standard
25987 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
25988 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
25989 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
25990 and the subsection number.
25991 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
25995 \begin_layout Standard
25997 \begin_inset space ~
26001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26003 reference "chap:Credits"
26008 \begin_inset space ~
26012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26014 reference "subsec:Export"
26021 \begin_layout Section
26023 \begin_inset Index idx
26026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26037 name "sec:Bibliography"
26044 \begin_layout Standard
26045 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26047 You can include a bibliography database,
26051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26052 Known under the name
26053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26056 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26066 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26067 manually, using the paragraph environment
26071 , which was described in section
26072 \begin_inset space ~
26076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26078 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
26083 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26084 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26088 use a bibliography database.
26091 \begin_layout Subsection
26092 The Bibliography Environment
26095 \begin_layout Standard
26100 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26102 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26111 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26113 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
26116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26123 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26126 \begin_layout Standard
26127 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26132 or the toolbar button
26135 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26139 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26140 containing the available citations.
26141 Select one or more keys from the list and
26151 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26152 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26156 \begin_layout Standard
26157 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26158 entry with surrounding brackets.
26163 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26164 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26176 \begin_layout Standard
26180 Companion Second Edition
26183 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26185 key "latexcompanion"
26193 \begin_layout Standard
26194 The \SpecialChar LyX
26195 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
26196 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26206 \begin_layout Standard
26207 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26210 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26212 \begin_inset space ~
26220 arg "layout-paragraph"
26224 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26227 \begin_layout Subsection
26228 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26230 \begin_inset Index idx
26233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26236 Bibliography ! Databases
26242 \begin_inset Index idx
26245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26248 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26257 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
26264 \begin_layout Standard
26265 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26271 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26273 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26274 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26279 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26281 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26282 your working field in a database.
26283 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26284 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26285 list for that document.
26286 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26290 \begin_layout Standard
26291 The database is a text file with the file extension
26292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26303 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26304 The format is explained in
26305 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26312 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26314 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26316 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26322 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26323 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26324 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
26326 \begin_inset Flex URL
26329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26331 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26339 \begin_layout Standard
26340 To use a database, use the menu
26342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26347 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26349 \begin_inset space ~
26355 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26356 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26363 Add bibliography to TOC
26365 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26370 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26371 in the document or just the cited references.
26374 \begin_layout Standard
26375 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26387 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26388 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
26389 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26390 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26392 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26398 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26399 \begin_inset Newline newline
26403 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26405 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26418 \begin_layout Standard
26419 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26422 \begin_layout Standard
26423 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
26424 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26426 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
26433 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26434 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26439 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
26440 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
26441 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
26445 The following variants are possible:
26448 \begin_layout Description
26449 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
26450 with other bibliography packages (e.
26451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26455 \begin_inset space \space{}
26462 ), only with the package
26466 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26470 \begin_layout Description
26471 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26472 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26473 with all bibliography packages, except
26478 \begin_layout Description
26479 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
26484 , works with all bibliography packages
26487 \begin_layout Standard
26488 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26489 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26491 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
26494 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26498 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26508 \begin_layout Standard
26509 When you select the option
26511 Sectioned bibliography
26515 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26516 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26519 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26520 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26522 Customizing Bibliographies
26526 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26531 Additional Features
26536 \begin_layout Standard
26537 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
26538 the two methods of creating them.
26539 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
26540 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
26541 We used the style file
26545 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
26548 \begin_layout Subsection
26550 \begin_inset Index idx
26553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26556 Bibliography ! Citation format
26564 \begin_layout Standard
26565 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
26566 For this feature you need to enable the option
26572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26576 \begin_inset Index idx
26579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26582 Document ! Settings
26592 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
26593 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26594 style files as explained in
26595 the previous section.
26598 \begin_layout Standard
26599 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
26600 the citation reference window.
26601 Here is an example where the text
26602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26606 \begin_inset space ~
26610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26613 appears after the reference:
26616 \begin_layout Standard
26618 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26621 key "latexcompanion"
26629 \begin_layout Section
26631 \begin_inset Index idx
26634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26652 \begin_layout Standard
26653 An index entry is created if you use the menu
26655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26657 \begin_inset space ~
26662 or the toolbar button
26669 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
26670 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
26671 by \SpecialChar LyX
26672 as the index entry.
26675 \begin_layout Standard
26676 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
26678 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26679 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26681 \begin_inset space ~
26687 A light blue box labeled
26688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26699 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
26700 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
26704 \begin_layout Standard
26705 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
26706 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
26707 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
26708 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26710 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26712 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
26720 \begin_layout Subsection
26721 Grouping Index Entries
26722 \begin_inset Index idx
26725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26736 \begin_layout Standard
26737 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
26739 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
26740 lists under the entry
26741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26749 First we create the entry
26750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26758 \begin_inset space ~
26762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26764 reference "subsec:Lists"
26769 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
26770 \begin_inset space ~
26774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26776 reference "sec:Itemize"
26780 , we insert the command
26783 \begin_layout Standard
26789 \begin_layout Standard
26793 \begin_layout Standard
26799 \begin_layout Standard
26800 for the enumerated list in section
26801 \begin_inset space ~
26805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26807 reference "sec:Enumerate"
26814 \begin_layout Standard
26815 The exclamation mark
26816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26823 marks the grouping levels.
26824 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
26825 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
26826 If we don't have an index entry for
26827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26834 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
26837 \begin_layout Subsection
26839 \begin_inset Index idx
26842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26845 Index ! Page ranges
26853 \begin_layout Standard
26854 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
26856 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
26857 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
26858 an index entry in section
26859 \begin_inset space ~
26863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26865 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
26872 \begin_layout Standard
26875 Paragraph environments|(
26878 \begin_layout Standard
26879 and another entry at the end of section
26880 \begin_inset space ~
26884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26886 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
26893 \begin_layout Standard
26896 Paragraph environments|)
26899 \begin_layout Standard
26901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26924 respectively start and end the index range.
26925 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
26926 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
26927 the pages of the indexed document parts.
26928 An example is the index entry
26929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26932 Document ! Settings
26933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26939 \begin_layout Subsection
26941 \begin_inset Index idx
26944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26947 Index ! Cross referencing
26955 \begin_layout Standard
26956 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
26957 We referred for example in the index entry
26958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26966 \begin_inset space ~
26970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26972 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
26976 ) to the index entry
26977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26984 in the same section using the entry
26987 \begin_layout Standard
26990 GIF|see{Image formats}
26993 \begin_layout Standard
26994 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
26996 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
26997 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27000 \begin_layout Subsection
27002 \begin_inset Index idx
27005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27008 Index ! Entry order
27016 \begin_layout Standard
27017 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27018 follow the rules for the index order.
27019 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27025 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27027 \begin_inset space ~
27031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27033 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27042 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27043 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27068 \begin_inset Index idx
27071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27074 Dummy entries ! maïs
27080 \begin_inset Index idx
27083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27086 Dummy entries ! maître
27092 \begin_inset Index idx
27095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27098 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27103 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27104 maïs, maison, maître.
27105 To achieve this, we use the command
27108 \begin_layout Standard
27111 previous entry@current entry
27114 \begin_layout Standard
27115 In our case we want to have
27116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27131 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27134 \begin_layout Standard
27140 \begin_layout Standard
27141 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27142 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
27144 See the next subsection for an example.
27147 \begin_layout Standard
27148 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27154 \begin_layout Standard
27155 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27160 to generate the index (see sec.
27161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27167 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27176 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27177 -package aeguill in sec.
27178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27184 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
27188 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
27189 -packages although all these index
27190 commands start with
27191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27204 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27209 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27212 \begin_layout Standard
27224 \begin_layout Standard
27236 \begin_layout Subsection
27238 \begin_inset Index idx
27241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27244 Index ! Entry layout
27252 \begin_layout Standard
27253 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27254 \begin_inset Index idx
27257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27262 This is an italic dummy entry
27267 You can also format the page number using the character
27268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27275 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
27276 -command without a backslash.
27277 We can write for example
27280 \begin_layout Standard
27283 italic page number:|textit
27286 \begin_layout Standard
27287 to get the page number in italic.
27288 \begin_inset Index idx
27291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27294 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27299 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
27300 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
27302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27318 \begin_inset space ~
27324 Have a look at section
27325 \begin_inset space ~
27329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27331 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
27335 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27339 \begin_layout Standard
27340 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27348 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27352 to generate the index, see sec.
27353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27359 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27368 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27373 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27374 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27377 key "latexcompanion"
27390 \begin_layout Standard
27391 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27393 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27394 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27395 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27396 If so, put the following in the preamble
27399 \begin_layout Standard
27411 \begin_layout Standard
27415 \begin_layout Standard
27421 \begin_layout Standard
27422 in the index entry.
27423 \begin_inset Index idx
27426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27429 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27434 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27435 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27436 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27439 \begin_layout Standard
27440 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27441 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27442 a bold font for all index entries.
27443 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27455 documentation for details,
27456 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27458 key "makeindex,xindy"
27466 \begin_layout Subsection
27468 \begin_inset Index idx
27471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27482 name "subsec:Index-Program"
27489 \begin_layout Standard
27490 If the index generation program
27494 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
27495 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27499 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
27500 distribution, is used.
27504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27509 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27510 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27511 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27512 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27513 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27523 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
27525 dialog, see section
27526 \begin_inset space ~
27530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27532 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
27537 The available options are listed and explained in
27538 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27540 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
27546 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27550 \begin_layout Standard
27551 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27552 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
27555 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27556 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27560 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
27561 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
27564 \begin_layout Subsection
27568 \begin_layout Standard
27569 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
27570 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
27571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27578 next to the standard index.
27580 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
27581 that add this feature.
27588 \begin_inset Index idx
27591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27595 -packages ! splitidx
27600 package to generate multiple indexes.
27601 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
27606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27607 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
27609 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27617 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
27618 style, but it also includes
27619 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
27620 Please consult the package's manual for details.
27628 \begin_layout Standard
27629 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
27630 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
27632 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27633 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27636 and select the option
27638 Use multiple Indexes
27645 already contains the standard index
27646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27654 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
27655 also appear as a heading) to the
27659 input field and press the
27664 The new index now also appears in the list.
27665 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
27666 label color to the new index.
27669 \begin_layout Standard
27670 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
27673 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27680 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
27681 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
27682 are additional features:
27685 \begin_layout Itemize
27686 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
27687 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
27690 \begin_layout Itemize
27691 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
27692 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
27693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27700 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
27701 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
27702 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
27703 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
27706 \begin_layout Section
27707 Nomenclature/Glossary
27708 \begin_inset Index idx
27711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27720 \begin_inset Index idx
27723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27756 name "sec:Nomenclature"
27763 \begin_layout Standard
27764 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
27765 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
27766 called nomenclature or glossary.
27769 \begin_layout Standard
27770 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27777 \begin_inset Index idx
27780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27784 -packages ! nomencl
27790 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
27792 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27799 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27803 \begin_layout Standard
27804 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
27805 and then use the menu
27807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27813 \begin_inset space ~
27818 or the toolbar button
27821 arg "nomencl-insert"
27826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27837 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
27840 \begin_layout Standard
27841 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
27842 The first is the term or
27846 that you wish to define.
27851 of the term or symbol.
27854 \begin_layout Standard
27855 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27863 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
27864 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
27872 \begin_layout Subsection
27873 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
27874 \begin_inset Index idx
27877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27880 Nomenclature ! Layout
27888 \begin_layout Standard
27889 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
27893 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
27896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27900 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
27904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27908 \begin_inset Newline newline
27916 \begin_inset Newline newline
27922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27929 character starts/ends the formula.
27930 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
27931 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
27933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27943 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
27953 \begin_layout Standard
27954 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27955 -syntax is given in section
27956 \begin_inset space ~
27960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27962 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
27969 \begin_layout Standard
27973 \begin_inset space ~
27978 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27980 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
27981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27985 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
27989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27992 in this document is:
27993 \begin_inset Newline newline
27998 dummy entry for the character
28003 \begin_inset Newline newline
28015 \begin_inset space ~
28025 font use the command
28054 \begin_layout Standard
28055 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28060 \begin_inset space \space{}
28064 \begin_inset Newline newline
28080 \begin_inset Newline newline
28083 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28084 This command will make the font of all symbols
28091 \begin_inset space ~
28099 \begin_layout Standard
28100 If the characters |
28101 \begin_inset space \space{}
28105 \begin_inset space \space{}
28109 \begin_inset space \space{}
28113 \begin_inset space \space{}
28117 \begin_inset space \space{}
28120 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28121 a quote character in front of them.
28122 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28123 LatexCommand nomenclature
28124 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28125 description "The quote sign is output by writing ` \"\"\"\" '"
28133 \begin_layout Subsection
28134 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28135 \begin_inset Index idx
28138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28141 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28149 \begin_layout Standard
28150 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28151 -code of the symbol
28153 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28155 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28158 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28159 LatexCommand nomenclature
28161 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28169 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28173 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28174 LatexCommand nomenclature
28177 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28183 They will be sorted by
28184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28210 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28213 will be sorted before the
28217 since the character
28218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28225 is considered in sorting.
28228 \begin_layout Standard
28229 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28232 \begin_inset space ~
28237 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28238 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28240 For the example given, you can insert
28244 in this field for the
28245 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28252 will be located before
28253 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28259 \begin_layout Standard
28260 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28265 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28275 \begin_layout Subsection
28276 Nomenclature Options
28277 \begin_inset Index idx
28280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28283 Nomenclature ! Options
28291 \begin_layout Standard
28296 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28297 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28300 \begin_layout Description
28301 refeq Appends the phrase
28302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28317 to every nomenclature entry, where
28323 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28326 \begin_layout Description
28327 refpage Appends the phrase
28328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28343 to every nomenclature entry, where
28349 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28352 \begin_layout Description
28353 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28356 \begin_layout Standard
28357 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28358 class options list in the
28360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28364 In this document the options
28371 \begin_layout Standard
28372 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28378 \begin_layout Standard
28379 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28380 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28385 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28388 \begin_layout Description
28398 \begin_layout Description
28401 nomrefpage Like the
28408 \begin_layout Description
28411 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28420 \begin_layout Description
28424 \begin_inset space ~
28430 \begin_inset space ~
28435 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28438 \begin_layout Standard
28440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28447 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28448 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28452 \begin_layout Standard
28460 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28463 \begin_inset Newline newline
28470 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28475 \begin_inset Newline newline
28479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28494 by their translation.
28497 \begin_layout Subsection
28498 Printing the Nomenclature
28499 \begin_inset Index idx
28502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28505 Nomenclature ! Printing
28513 \begin_layout Standard
28514 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28517 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28533 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28534 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28535 You can choose between these settings:
28538 \begin_layout Description
28539 Default a space of 1
28540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28546 \begin_layout Description
28548 \begin_inset space ~
28552 \begin_inset space ~
28555 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28558 \begin_layout Description
28559 Custom custom space
28562 \begin_layout Standard
28563 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28572 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28580 For example, in order to change the name to
28584 , add the following line to the preamble:
28587 \begin_layout Standard
28594 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28597 \begin_layout Subsection
28598 Nomenclature Program
28599 \begin_inset Index idx
28602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28605 Nomenclature ! Program
28611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28613 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
28620 \begin_layout Standard
28626 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28627 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28629 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28634 by adding options, see section
28635 \begin_inset space ~
28639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28641 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28646 The available options are listed and explained in
28647 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28649 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28657 \begin_layout Section
28659 \begin_inset Index idx
28662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28671 \begin_inset Index idx
28674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28677 Document ! Branches
28683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28685 name "sec:Branches"
28692 \begin_layout Standard
28693 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
28694 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
28695 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
28696 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
28699 \begin_layout Standard
28700 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
28701 allows you to put text into branches.
28702 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
28703 To create a branch, either select the menu
28705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28706 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
28709 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
28711 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28718 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
28719 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
28720 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
28721 and whether the name of the branch should
28722 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
28723 (see below for an example).
28724 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
28725 to the name of the other) and to add
28726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28738 \begin_inset space ~
28741 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
28742 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
28745 \begin_layout Standard
28746 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
28747 These boxes are inserted via the menu
28749 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28752 where you can choose a branch.
28753 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
28757 \begin_layout Standard
28758 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
28759 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
28762 \begin_layout Standard
28763 \begin_inset Branch Question
28767 \begin_layout Standard
28770 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
28778 \begin_layout Standard
28779 \begin_inset Branch Answer
28783 \begin_layout Standard
28786 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
28794 \begin_layout Standard
28801 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28802 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28805 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
28806 Consider for example a file
28807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28814 which has the above branches.
28816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28823 is active, the PDF export file would be called
28824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28847 branch were inactive,
28848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28863 branch was active, likewise
28864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28879 branch was active, and
28880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28883 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
28884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28887 if both branches were active.
28888 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
28891 \begin_layout Standard
28892 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28898 \begin_layout Standard
28899 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
28900 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
28901 definitions for each branch.
28902 For example you can define for the question branch
28906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28907 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28908 -syntax, see section
28909 \begin_inset space ~
28913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28915 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28927 \begin_layout Standard
28937 \begin_layout Standard
28947 \begin_layout Standard
28948 and for the answer branch
28951 \begin_layout Standard
28961 \begin_layout Standard
28971 \begin_layout Standard
28972 \begin_inset Branch Question
28976 \begin_layout Standard
28982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29010 \begin_layout Standard
29011 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29015 \begin_layout Standard
29021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29049 \begin_layout Standard
29050 Now it is possible to use the
29054 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29061 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29064 commands to obtain conditional output.
29065 Here is an example formula where only the
29072 \begin_inset Formula
29074 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29082 \begin_layout Standard
29083 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29091 \begin_layout Standard
29092 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29098 \begin_inset space \space{}
29101 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29103 For this advanced usage, see the
29108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29111 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29118 \begin_layout Section
29120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29122 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29127 \begin_inset Index idx
29130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29141 \begin_layout Standard
29144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29145 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29148 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29150 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29156 \begin_inset Index idx
29159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29163 -packages ! hyperref
29168 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29169 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29170 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29171 part of the document.
29175 \begin_layout Standard
29176 The header information in the dialog tab
29180 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29181 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29182 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29183 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29187 \begin_inset space ~
29191 \begin_inset space ~
29196 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
29197 tries to extract the header information from your document title
29198 and author entries.
29202 \begin_inset space ~
29206 \begin_inset space ~
29210 \begin_inset space ~
29215 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29218 \begin_layout Standard
29219 You can specify in the dialog tab
29223 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29228 \begin_inset space ~
29232 \begin_inset space ~
29236 \begin_inset space ~
29241 option allows long links to be split;
29244 \begin_inset space ~
29248 \begin_inset space ~
29252 \begin_inset space ~
29260 \begin_inset space ~
29265 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29268 \begin_inset space ~
29273 colors the different links.
29274 The default colors are:
29277 \begin_layout Labeling
29278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29283 for hyperlinks and URLs
29286 \begin_layout Labeling
29287 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29295 \begin_layout Labeling
29296 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29304 \begin_layout Standard
29305 but you can change these in the field
29310 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29313 \begin_layout Standard
29316 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29319 \begin_layout Standard
29324 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29325 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29326 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29329 \begin_layout Standard
29334 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29335 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29336 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29346 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29347 when opening the PDF.
29349 \begin_inset space ~
29352 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29353 \begin_inset space ~
29356 1 will only display the sections.
29359 \begin_layout Standard
29360 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29361 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29367 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29368 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29378 \begin_layout Section
29380 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29384 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29391 \begin_layout Subsection
29394 \begin_inset Index idx
29397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29409 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29416 \begin_layout Standard
29417 As \SpecialChar LyX
29418 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
29419 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
29420 commands and constructs,
29423 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29424 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29425 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29426 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29427 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
29428 cannot support all packages and
29432 \begin_layout Standard
29433 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
29434 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
29435 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
29439 Code box is created by the menu
29441 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29443 \begin_inset space ~
29448 or by the toolbar button
29461 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29469 \begin_layout Standard
29470 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
29472 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
29474 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29475 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29482 , you can write the command part
29488 in a \SpecialChar TeX
29489 Code box before the word and the closing brace
29493 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
29494 Code box behind the word.
29495 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
29496 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
29500 \begin_layout Standard
29501 \begin_inset Graphics
29502 filename ../clipart/ERT.png
29510 \begin_layout Standard
29514 \begin_layout Standard
29515 This is a line with a
29519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29542 \begin_layout Standard
29543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29551 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29552 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29553 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
29554 know that the command is finished.
29562 \begin_layout Subsection
29563 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29565 \begin_inset Argument 1
29568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29571 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
29578 \begin_inset Index idx
29581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29593 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29600 \begin_layout Standard
29601 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29602 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29603 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
29604 uses in the background.
29605 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
29606 is based on commands, you can
29607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29615 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29616 any time if you know the right commands.
29617 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
29618 is the end of the day.
29619 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29620 all caption labels bold.
29621 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29623 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29627 \begin_layout Standard
29628 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
29630 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29632 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29635 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29645 \begin_layout Standard
29646 As result you find that the package
29651 \begin_inset Index idx
29654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29658 -packages ! caption
29664 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29666 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29669 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29673 \begin_inset space ~
29681 \begin_layout Standard
29686 usepackage[options]{package name}
29689 \begin_layout Standard
29690 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
29691 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29692 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
29693 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29696 \begin_layout Standard
29697 In your case the package name is
29702 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29707 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29708 So you add the command
29711 \begin_layout Standard
29716 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29719 \begin_layout Standard
29720 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29725 For more commands provided by the
29729 package, have a look at its documentation,
29730 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29745 \begin_layout Standard
29746 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
29748 For example if you use a
29752 class, you don't need the package
29756 , you can instead write
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29764 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29769 \begin_layout Standard
29770 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29771 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29772 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29779 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29782 \begin_layout Standard
29783 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29784 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29786 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29787 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
29788 Code box as described in the previous
29792 \begin_layout Standard
29793 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29794 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29797 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29799 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
29807 \begin_layout Standard
29808 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
29814 \begin_layout Standard
29818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29828 \begin_inset Note Note
29831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29834 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
29842 \begin_layout Left Header
29843 \begin_inset Argument 1
29846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29866 \begin_inset Note Note
29869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29872 defines the header line as described below
29880 \begin_layout Center Header
29881 \begin_inset Argument 1
29884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29893 \begin_layout Right Header
29894 \begin_inset Argument 1
29897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29920 \begin_layout Left Footer
29921 \begin_inset Argument 1
29924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29947 \begin_layout Center Footer
29948 \begin_inset Argument 1
29951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29964 \begin_inset Newline newline
29968 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
29974 \begin_layout Right Footer
29975 \begin_inset Argument 1
29978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30000 \begin_layout Section
30001 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30004 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30009 \begin_inset Index idx
30012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30015 Document ! Header/Footer line
30021 \begin_inset Index idx
30024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30035 \begin_layout Standard
30036 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30040 \begin_inset space ~
30051 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30057 \begin_inset space ~
30063 As a second step add in the menu
30065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30066 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30073 Custom Header/Footerlines
30074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30078 This module offers the following 6
30079 \begin_inset space ~
30085 \begin_layout Description
30087 \begin_inset space ~
30091 \begin_inset space ~
30095 \begin_inset space ~
30099 \begin_inset space ~
30103 \begin_inset space ~
30109 \begin_layout Description
30111 \begin_inset space ~
30115 \begin_inset space ~
30119 \begin_inset space ~
30123 \begin_inset space ~
30127 \begin_inset space ~
30133 \begin_layout Standard
30134 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30137 \begin_layout Standard
30138 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30139 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30141 \begin_inset space ~
30145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30147 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30151 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30154 \begin_layout Standard
30155 \begin_inset Float figure
30161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30164 \begin_inset Tabular
30165 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30166 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30167 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30168 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30169 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30171 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30189 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30200 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30218 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30229 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30233 The normal text on the page goes here.
30234 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30236 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30237 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30242 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30251 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30262 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30280 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30291 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30309 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30327 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30334 name "fig:Page-layout"
30338 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30351 \begin_layout Standard
30352 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30360 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30364 \begin_inset space ~
30369 is set to “Default”.
30370 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30379 \begin_layout Subsection
30383 \begin_layout Standard
30384 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30385 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30386 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30387 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30389 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30390 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30393 \begin_layout Standard
30394 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
30395 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30399 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30401 \begin_inset space ~
30409 \begin_layout Description
30412 thepage prints the current page number
30415 \begin_layout Description
30418 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30421 \begin_layout Description
30424 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30427 \begin_layout Description
30430 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30431 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30438 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30441 because it usually goes in a left header.
30444 \begin_layout Description
30447 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30448 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30450 It is normally used in the right header.
30453 \begin_layout Subsection
30454 Default header/footer
30457 \begin_layout Standard
30458 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30459 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30460 footer has the page number.
30461 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30462 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30463 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30466 \begin_inset space ~
30474 \begin_layout Subsection
30478 \begin_layout Standard
30479 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30480 Some pages are different.
30481 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30482 a new part or chapter in your book.
30483 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30484 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30485 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30489 Header and footer decoration line
30492 \begin_layout Standard
30493 By default, you get a 0.4
30494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30497 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30498 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30510 in the following way:
30513 \begin_layout Standard
30520 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30523 \begin_layout Standard
30524 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30533 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30540 \begin_layout Standard
30541 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30543 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30544 \begin_inset space ~
30548 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30558 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30559 Several header/footer lines
30562 \begin_layout Standard
30563 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30564 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30565 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30567 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30582 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30583 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30596 \begin_inset space ~
30604 \begin_layout Standard
30611 headheight}{height}
30614 \begin_layout Standard
30615 where height is a size in standard units.
30616 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30617 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
30618 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30619 logfile with the menu
30621 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30627 \begin_inset space ~
30632 to see if you can find a warning about the package
30637 \begin_inset Index idx
30640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30644 -packages ! fancyhdr
30650 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30651 for your header/footer.
30654 \begin_layout Subsection
30658 \begin_layout Standard
30659 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30660 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30661 This example consists of the following definition:
30664 \begin_layout Description
30666 \begin_inset space ~
30675 , empty optional argument
30678 \begin_layout Description
30680 \begin_inset space ~
30683 Header empty, empty optional argument
30686 \begin_layout Description
30688 \begin_inset space ~
30697 in the optional argument
30700 \begin_layout Description
30702 \begin_inset space ~
30711 in the optional argument
30714 \begin_layout Description
30716 \begin_inset space ~
30729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30733 \begin_inset Newline newline
30737 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30744 in the optional argument
30747 \begin_layout Description
30749 \begin_inset space ~
30758 , empty optional argument
30761 \begin_layout Description
30764 headrulewidth set to 2
30765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30771 \begin_layout Standard
30772 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
30773 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
30779 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30789 \begin_layout Standard
30790 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30796 \begin_layout Standard
30800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30804 pagestyle{headings}
30810 \begin_inset Note Note
30813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30816 switches back to page style with the default headings
30824 \begin_layout Section
30825 Previewing Snippets of your Document
30826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30828 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
30833 \begin_inset Index idx
30836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30845 \begin_inset Index idx
30848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30859 \begin_layout Standard
30861 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
30862 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
30863 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
30866 \begin_layout Subsection
30870 \begin_layout Standard
30871 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30877 \begin_inset Index idx
30880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30884 -packages ! preview-latex
30889 (on some systems named simply
30894 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30896 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30903 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30905 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
30913 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
30914 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30915 -package are automatically
30916 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
30920 \begin_layout Subsection
30924 \begin_layout Standard
30925 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
30926 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30928 activate the option
30931 \begin_inset space ~
30938 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30944 \begin_inset space ~
30948 \begin_inset space ~
30951 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
30958 \begin_inset space ~
30971 \begin_inset space ~
30976 is the multiplication factor for the size.
30979 \begin_layout Standard
30980 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30985 \begin_inset space ~
30993 \begin_inset space ~
31001 \begin_layout Standard
31002 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31003 and when you finish
31007 \begin_layout Standard
31008 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31016 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31017 generated by activating the option
31020 \begin_inset space ~
31026 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31034 \begin_layout Subsection
31035 Selected document parts
31038 \begin_layout Standard
31039 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31040 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31041 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31042 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31044 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31046 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31050 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31051 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31052 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31055 \begin_layout Standard
31056 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31063 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31075 is explained in section
31077 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31082 \begin_inset space ~
31092 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31093 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31094 the final rotated boxes,
31095 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31096 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31098 Here is the result:
31101 \begin_layout Standard
31102 \begin_inset Preview
31104 \begin_layout Standard
31111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31115 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31121 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31131 height_special "totalheight"
31136 backgroundcolor "none"
31139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31166 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31172 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31194 \begin_layout Standard
31195 Previewing works also for colors.
31196 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31215 is explained in section
31222 \begin_inset space ~
31235 \begin_layout Standard
31236 \begin_inset Preview
31238 \begin_layout Standard
31244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31263 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31268 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31287 \begin_layout Standard
31288 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31294 \begin_layout Standard
31295 If \SpecialChar LyX
31296 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31297 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
31298 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
31299 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31300 packages in your document preamble that are required by
31301 the \SpecialChar TeX
31303 If \SpecialChar LyX
31304 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
31305 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
31307 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
31308 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
31309 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
31312 \begin_layout Subsection
31317 \begin_layout Standard
31318 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31319 source of the whole document or parts of it.
31322 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
31324 \begin_inset space ~
31329 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31331 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31333 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
31334 's main window, then only this selection
31335 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31336 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31337 the source view window.
31342 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
31343 ; but note that if you have
31344 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
31346 not just the one which is open at the time.
31349 \begin_layout Section
31350 Advanced Find and Replace
31351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31353 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31358 \begin_inset Index idx
31361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31370 \begin_inset Index idx
31373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31384 \begin_layout Subsection
31388 \begin_layout Standard
31389 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
31390 allows for searching of complex,
31391 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
31393 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31394 The key-features are:
31397 \begin_layout Itemize
31398 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31399 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31400 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31404 \begin_layout Itemize
31405 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31406 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31407 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31408 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31411 \begin_layout Itemize
31412 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31413 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31414 outside of mathematics environments
31417 \begin_layout Itemize
31418 Search may be widened to a specific
31423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31427 \begin_inset space ~
31430 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31431 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31438 \begin_layout Itemize
31439 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31440 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31445 \begin_inset space ~
31448 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31451 \begin_layout Subsection
31455 \begin_layout Standard
31456 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31471 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31474 ) or the toolbar button
31477 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31483 Advanced Find and Replace
31488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31492 \begin_layout Standard
31498 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31502 \begin_inset space ~
31507 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31510 arg "paragraph-break"
31514 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31515 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31519 arg "paragraph-break"
31522 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31526 searches backwards.
31529 \begin_layout Standard
31533 \begin_inset space ~
31538 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31547 \begin_inset space ~
31552 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31555 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31556 Searching for mathematics
31559 \begin_layout Standard
31560 Mathematical formulas, such as
31561 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31564 or something more complex like
31565 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31568 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31573 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31574 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31575 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31576 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31582 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31586 \begin_layout Standard
31587 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31588 This is done by switching to the
31592 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31597 This way, entering in the
31604 \begin_layout Itemize
31605 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31606 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
31609 \begin_layout Itemize
31610 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31611 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
31614 \begin_layout Itemize
31615 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
31616 of it only within section headings.
31617 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31618 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31622 \begin_layout Itemize
31623 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31624 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31627 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31631 \begin_layout Standard
31632 The entries made in the
31636 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
31639 \begin_inset space ~
31645 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31649 button or alternatively press
31652 arg "paragraph-break"
31659 while the cursor is in the
31662 \begin_inset space ~
31670 \begin_layout Standard
31671 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
31673 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
31677 \begin_layout Itemize
31678 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31679 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31687 with its typewriter version
31688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31702 \begin_layout Itemize
31703 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31709 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31721 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
31725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31728 (you may want to enable the
31731 \begin_inset space ~
31739 \begin_inset space ~
31744 options and disable the
31752 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
31753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31760 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
31761 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
31765 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
31768 , or occurrences of
31769 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
31773 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
31779 \begin_layout Subsection
31783 \begin_layout Standard
31784 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
31788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31789 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
31791 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31793 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
31803 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
31809 This is done with the context menu
31811 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31812 Insert Regular Expression
31814 while the cursor is in the
31819 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
31820 expression matching rules
31824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31825 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
31828 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31832 \begin_inset space ~
31835 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
31836 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
31842 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
31843 same text in the document.
31844 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
31845 Examples of using such a feature may be:
31848 \begin_layout Enumerate
31849 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
31854 editor the fraction
31855 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
31859 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31862 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
31863 fractions with the given denominator.
31866 \begin_layout Enumerate
31867 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
31879 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31884 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
31885 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
31886 Also, by inserting a
31887 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31890 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
31891 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
31894 \begin_layout Standard
31895 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
31896 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
31897 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31900 , and referring back to them through
31901 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31905 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
31909 For example, try searching with the regexp
31910 \begin_inset Newline newline
31913 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
31916 \begin_inset Newline newline
31919 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31923 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
31926 \begin_layout Standard
31927 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31935 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
31936 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
31937 sub-expressions is absolute.
31939 \begin_inset space ~
31943 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31946 always refers to the first occurrence of
31947 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31950 in all entered regexps.
31958 \begin_layout Section
31960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31962 name "sec:Spellchecking"
31967 \begin_inset Index idx
31970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31981 \begin_layout Standard
31983 has a built-in spell checker.
31986 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31993 key or the toolbar button
31996 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
31999 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32000 beginning of the currently selected text.
32001 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32002 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32003 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32004 scrolled so that it is visible.
32005 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32006 n, if any could be found.
32007 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32011 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32012 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32015 \begin_layout Standard
32016 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32019 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32023 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32024 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32026 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32027 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32030 \begin_inset space ~
32038 arg "dialog-show character"
32041 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32043 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32046 \begin_layout Standard
32047 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32048 can be downloaded from here:
32049 \begin_inset Newline newline
32053 \begin_inset Flex URL
32056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32058 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32064 \begin_inset Newline newline
32068 \begin_inset space ~
32071 files for each language.
32072 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32073 \begin_inset space ~
32076 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32077 's installation subfolder
32085 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32087 \begin_inset Newline newline
32090 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32091 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32092 but in most cases these are
32108 is the language code.
32111 \begin_layout Subsection
32115 \begin_layout Standard
32118 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32119 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32121 \begin_inset space ~
32124 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32127 you can set the following things:
32130 \begin_layout Description
32132 \begin_inset space ~
32135 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32136 should use for spell checking.
32137 Depending on your platform,
32151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32152 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32153 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32168 \begin_inset space ~
32171 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32174 \begin_layout Description
32176 \begin_inset space ~
32179 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32180 will always use the given language
32181 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32184 \begin_layout Description
32186 \begin_inset space ~
32189 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32195 \begin_inset space \space{}
32199 This should normally not be needed.
32202 \begin_layout Description
32204 \begin_inset space ~
32208 \begin_inset space ~
32211 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32223 \begin_layout Description
32225 \begin_inset space ~
32228 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32229 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32230 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32231 appear in a context menu.
32232 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32236 \begin_layout Description
32238 \begin_inset space ~
32242 \begin_inset space ~
32246 \begin_inset space ~
32249 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32253 \begin_layout Section
32255 \begin_inset Index idx
32258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32269 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32276 \begin_layout Standard
32278 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32279 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32289 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32291 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32301 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
32303 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
32304 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32305 which are available for many languages.
32308 \begin_layout Standard
32309 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32310 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
32314 \begin_layout Subsection
32315 Setting up the thesaurus
32318 \begin_layout Standard
32327 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32331 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32336 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32342 \begin_inset space ~
32350 For instance, the US English files are named:
32353 \begin_layout Itemize
32357 \begin_layout Itemize
32361 \begin_layout Standard
32370 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32371 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
32374 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32375 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32376 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
32378 \begin_inset space ~
32383 ) to the path where they are installed.
32387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32388 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32389 ies, typical locations are
32395 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32399 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32403 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32406 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32412 LibreOffice-<Version>
32419 On the Mac, the default location is
32421 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
32422 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
32423 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
32424 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
32425 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
32426 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
32434 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32435 during the \SpecialChar LyX
32436 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
32440 \begin_layout Standard
32441 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
32442 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32446 \begin_layout Itemize
32447 \begin_inset Flex URL
32450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32452 https://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32460 \begin_layout Standard
32461 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32462 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32464 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32465 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32466 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
32468 \begin_inset space ~
32473 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32475 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32476 and point \SpecialChar LyX
32480 \begin_layout Standard
32481 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32483 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
32486 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32492 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32495 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
32496 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32504 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32505 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32506 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
32508 \begin_inset space ~
32513 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32516 \begin_layout Subsection
32517 Using the thesaurus
32520 \begin_layout Standard
32521 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32523 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32526 or the toolbar button
32529 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32532 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32534 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32536 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32537 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32538 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32547 ), related terms (such as
32550 \begin_inset space ~
32559 ), compounds (such as
32562 \begin_inset space ~
32571 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32580 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32583 \begin_layout Standard
32584 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32585 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32589 \begin_layout Standard
32590 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32591 the dictionary, such as the above
32595 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32600 \begin_inset space \space{}
32603 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32604 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32605 For example, looking up the word form
32609 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32614 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32619 \begin_inset space \space{}
32630 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32631 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32632 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32635 \begin_layout Section
32637 \begin_inset Index idx
32640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32649 \begin_inset Index idx
32652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32655 Document ! Change Tracking
32661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32663 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32670 \begin_layout Standard
32671 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32672 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32673 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32674 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32676 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32678 \begin_inset space ~
32681 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32683 \begin_inset space ~
32691 \begin_layout Standard
32692 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32706 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32707 You can change the color in
32709 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32710 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32712 \begin_inset space ~
32716 \begin_inset space ~
32721 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32727 \begin_inset Index idx
32730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32733 Color ! Change tracking
32738 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
32739 's status bar when the
32740 cursor is in changed text.
32741 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32744 arg "changes-merge"
32750 \begin_layout Standard
32751 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
32753 \begin_inset Index idx
32756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32767 \begin_layout Standard
32768 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32774 \begin_layout Standard
32775 \begin_inset Graphics
32776 filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
32784 \begin_layout Standard
32785 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32791 \begin_layout Standard
32792 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
32795 \begin_layout Standard
32796 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32802 \begin_layout Standard
32803 \begin_inset Tabular
32804 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
32805 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
32806 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32807 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32817 arg "changes-track"
32825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32831 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32833 \begin_inset space ~
32836 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32838 \begin_inset space ~
32847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32856 arg "changes-output"
32864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32872 \begin_inset space ~
32875 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32877 \begin_inset space ~
32881 \begin_inset space ~
32885 \begin_inset space ~
32894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32915 Jumps to the next change
32921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32930 arg "change-accept"
32938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32946 \begin_inset space ~
32949 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32951 \begin_inset space ~
32960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32969 arg "change-reject"
32977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32985 \begin_inset space ~
32988 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32990 \begin_inset space ~
32999 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33008 arg "changes-merge"
33016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33024 \begin_inset space ~
33027 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33029 \begin_inset space ~
33038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33047 arg "all-changes-accept"
33055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33061 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33063 \begin_inset space ~
33066 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33068 \begin_inset space ~
33072 \begin_inset space ~
33081 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33090 arg "all-changes-reject"
33098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33104 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33106 \begin_inset space ~
33109 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33111 \begin_inset space ~
33115 \begin_inset space ~
33124 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33147 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33148 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33150 \begin_inset space ~
33159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33182 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33184 \begin_inset space ~
33200 \begin_layout Standard
33201 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33207 \begin_layout Standard
33208 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33228 \begin_layout Standard
33229 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33230 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33231 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33232 the next change after the current cursor position.
33233 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33234 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33235 step to the next change.
33236 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33239 \begin_layout Standard
33240 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33241 to describe a change.
33244 \begin_layout Standard
33245 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33251 \begin_inset Index idx
33254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33258 -packages ! dvipost
33264 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33266 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33273 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33277 \begin_layout Section
33278 Comparison of Documents
33279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33281 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33286 \begin_inset Index idx
33289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33292 Comparison of documents
33300 \begin_layout Standard
33301 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
33304 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33308 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
33309 file with change tracking enabled showing the
33311 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
33313 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33317 \begin_inset space ~
33321 \begin_inset space ~
33325 \begin_inset space ~
33334 \begin_inset space ~
33338 \begin_inset space ~
33342 \begin_inset space ~
33346 \begin_inset space ~
33350 \begin_inset space ~
33354 \begin_inset space ~
33359 enables the change tracking option
33362 \begin_inset space ~
33366 \begin_inset space ~
33370 \begin_inset space ~
33375 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33378 \begin_layout Section
33379 International Support
33380 \begin_inset Index idx
33383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33386 International support
33394 \begin_layout Standard
33395 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
33396 with any language you want.
33397 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33398 up \SpecialChar LyX
33400 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33402 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33410 \begin_layout Standard
33411 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
33412 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33413 \begin_inset space ~
33417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33419 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
33426 \begin_layout Subsection
33428 \begin_inset Index idx
33431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33440 \begin_inset Index idx
33443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33446 Document ! Settings
33452 \begin_inset Index idx
33455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33458 Document ! Language
33466 \begin_layout Standard
33469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33470 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33473 dialog lets you set the language, the quote style and character encoding.
33476 \begin_layout Standard
33481 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
33486 \begin_inset space ~
33491 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33492 For details about the different encoding options see section
33493 \begin_inset space ~
33497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33499 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33506 \begin_layout Subsection
33507 Keyboard mapping configuration
33508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33510 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
33517 \begin_layout Standard
33518 If you have for example a U.
33519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33522 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33523 can use an alternate keymap.
33524 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
33529 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33530 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33531 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
33534 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33535 \begin_inset space ~
33539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33541 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
33546 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33547 which one you want to use.
33550 \begin_layout Standard
33551 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33552 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33553 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33557 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33558 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33559 one to support the characters you want.
33560 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33567 \begin_layout Chapter
33570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33572 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33579 \begin_layout Standard
33580 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33581 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33582 topic inside the user's guide.
33585 \begin_layout Section
33587 \begin_inset Index idx
33590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33601 \begin_layout Standard
33606 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33609 \begin_layout Subsection
33613 \begin_layout Standard
33614 Creates a new document.
33617 \begin_layout Subsection
33621 \begin_layout Standard
33622 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33623 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33624 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33627 \begin_layout Subsection
33631 \begin_layout Standard
33635 \begin_layout Subsection
33639 \begin_layout Standard
33640 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33641 Click there on a file to open it.
33644 \begin_layout Subsection
33648 \begin_layout Standard
33649 Closes the current document.
33652 \begin_layout Subsection
33656 \begin_layout Standard
33657 Closes all opened documents.
33660 \begin_layout Subsection
33664 \begin_layout Standard
33665 Saves the actual document.
33668 \begin_layout Subsection
33672 \begin_layout Standard
33673 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33676 \begin_layout Subsection
33680 \begin_layout Standard
33681 Saves all opened documents.
33684 \begin_layout Subsection
33688 \begin_layout Standard
33689 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33692 \begin_layout Subsection
33696 \begin_layout Standard
33697 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33698 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33699 It is described in the section
33701 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
33706 Additional Features
33711 \begin_layout Subsection
33715 \begin_layout Standard
33716 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
33717 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
33719 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
33720 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
33724 \begin_layout Standard
33725 When using the menu entry
33728 \begin_inset space ~
33733 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33737 \begin_inset space ~
33741 \begin_inset space ~
33745 \begin_inset space ~
33750 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33751 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33754 \begin_layout Subsection
33756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33758 name "subsec:Export"
33765 \begin_layout Standard
33766 You can export your document to various file formats.
33767 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
33769 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33770 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
33771 during its configuration.
33774 \begin_layout Standard
33775 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
33777 \begin_inset space ~
33781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33783 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
33790 \begin_layout Description
33792 \begin_inset space ~
33795 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
33797 \begin_inset space ~
33800 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
33801 \begin_inset Newline newline
33804 Since \SpecialChar LyX
33805 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
33809 \begin_layout Description
33810 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
33816 \begin_layout Description
33818 \begin_inset space ~
33821 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
33827 \begin_layout Description
33828 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
33829 's native DVI-format.
33830 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
33831 files paths or file names in your document.
33833 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
33840 \begin_layout Description
33841 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
33842 in files paths or file names
33845 \begin_layout Description
33847 \begin_inset space ~
33850 (LuaTeX) DVI-format using the program
33852 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
33855 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
33859 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33867 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
33875 \begin_layout Description
33877 \begin_inset space ~
33880 (cropped) the same as
33884 but with cropped page margins.
33887 \begin_layout Description
33889 \begin_inset space ~
33892 Dot text file with code in the programming language
33896 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
33901 \begin_layout Description
33905 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33913 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
33921 \begin_layout Description
33923 \begin_inset space ~
33927 \begin_inset space ~
33930 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
33934 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
33942 \begin_layout Description
33944 \begin_inset space ~
33947 (LuaTeX) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33948 source that is compilable with the program
33951 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
33955 \begin_layout Description
33957 \begin_inset space ~
33960 (pdflatex) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33961 source, additionally all images used in the
33962 document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
33966 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
33969 \begin_layout Description
33971 \begin_inset space ~
33974 (plain) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33975 source code, additionally all images used in
33976 the document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
33984 \begin_layout Description
33986 \begin_inset space ~
33989 (XeTeX) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33990 source that is compilable with the program
33996 \begin_layout Description
33998 \begin_inset space ~
34002 \begin_inset space ~
34005 (LaTeX) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34006 source and also code in the syntax of the music
34012 \begin_layout Description
34014 \begin_inset space ~
34017 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34018 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34024 \begin_inset space \space{}
34029 \begin_inset space ~
34033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34048 represent the version number)
34051 \begin_layout Description
34053 \begin_inset space ~
34057 \begin_inset space ~
34060 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34061 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34062 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34066 \begin_layout Description
34067 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34068 's internal XHTML engine
34071 \begin_layout Description
34072 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34077 \begin_layout Description
34078 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34080 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34083 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34087 \begin_layout Description
34089 \begin_inset space ~
34092 (cropped) the same as
34095 \begin_inset space ~
34100 but with cropped page margins
34103 \begin_layout Description
34105 \begin_inset space ~
34108 (dvipdfm) PDF-format using the program
34112 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34115 \begin_layout Description
34117 \begin_inset space ~
34121 \begin_inset space ~
34124 resolution) the same as
34127 \begin_inset space ~
34132 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34137 \begin_inset space \space{}
34140 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34144 \begin_layout Description
34146 \begin_inset space ~
34149 (LuaTeX) PDF-format using the program
34151 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34154 , produces PDF-files directly
34157 \begin_layout Description
34159 \begin_inset space ~
34162 (pdflatex) PDF-format using the program
34166 , produces PDF-files directly
34169 \begin_layout Description
34171 \begin_inset space ~
34174 (ps2pdf) PDF-format using the program
34178 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34181 \begin_layout Description
34183 \begin_inset space ~
34186 (XeTeX) PDF-format using the program
34191 , produces PDF-files directly
34194 \begin_layout Description
34196 \begin_inset space ~
34202 \begin_layout Description
34204 \begin_inset space ~
34208 \begin_inset space ~
34211 (ps2ascii) text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript
34212 format and then exported as text using the program
34217 \begin_layout Description
34218 Postscript PostScript format using the program
34223 \begin_layout Description
34224 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34225 source and also code in the statistical programming
34239 it is possible to use
34243 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
34247 \begin_layout Standard
34248 If one of the menu entries
34255 \begin_inset space ~
34264 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34266 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
34268 \begin_inset space ~
34272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34274 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34279 \begin_inset Index idx
34282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34285 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
34294 \begin_layout Subsection
34298 \begin_layout Standard
34299 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34300 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
34303 \begin_inset space ~
34307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34309 reference "sec:Paths"
34314 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34323 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34324 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
34325 's preferences as described in section
34326 \begin_inset space ~
34330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34332 reference "subsec:Converters"
34339 \begin_layout Subsection
34340 New and Close Window
34343 \begin_layout Standard
34344 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
34348 \begin_layout Subsection
34352 \begin_layout Standard
34353 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34356 \begin_layout Section
34358 \begin_inset Index idx
34361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34372 \begin_layout Subsection
34376 \begin_layout Standard
34377 Described in section
34378 \begin_inset space ~
34382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34384 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34391 \begin_layout Subsection
34392 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34395 \begin_layout Standard
34396 Described in section
34397 \begin_inset space ~
34401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34403 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34410 \begin_layout Subsection
34414 \begin_layout Standard
34415 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34416 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34419 \begin_layout Subsection
34423 \begin_layout Standard
34424 Selects the whole document.
34427 \begin_layout Subsection
34428 Find & Replace (Quick)
34431 \begin_layout Standard
34432 Described in section
34433 \begin_inset space ~
34437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34439 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34446 \begin_layout Subsection
34447 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34450 \begin_layout Standard
34451 Described in section
34452 \begin_inset space ~
34456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34458 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34465 \begin_layout Subsection
34466 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34469 \begin_layout Standard
34470 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34474 \begin_layout Subsection
34478 \begin_layout Standard
34479 Described in section
34480 \begin_inset space ~
34484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34486 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34493 \begin_layout Subsection
34495 \begin_inset Index idx
34498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34501 Paragraph ! Settings
34509 \begin_layout Standard
34510 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34511 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34515 \begin_layout Standard
34516 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34517 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
34523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34524 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34526 \begin_inset space ~
34534 \begin_layout Subsection
34538 \begin_layout Standard
34539 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
34540 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
34541 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
34545 \begin_layout Standard
34546 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34548 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34549 The properties of tables are described in section
34550 \begin_inset space ~
34554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34556 reference "sec:Tables"
34560 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34561 \begin_inset space ~
34565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34567 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34574 \begin_layout Subsection
34575 Increase/Decrease List Depth
34578 \begin_layout Standard
34579 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
34581 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34582 \begin_inset space ~
34586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34588 reference "sec:Nesting"
34593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34595 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
34602 \begin_layout Subsection
34603 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
34606 \begin_layout Standard
34607 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
34608 nts of the same type.
34610 \begin_inset space ~
34614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34616 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
34620 for an explanation.
34623 \begin_layout Section
34625 \begin_inset Index idx
34628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34639 \begin_layout Standard
34640 At the bottom of the
34644 menu the opened documents are listed.
34647 \begin_layout Subsection
34648 Open/Close all Insets
34651 \begin_layout Standard
34652 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
34655 \begin_layout Subsection
34656 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
34659 \begin_layout Standard
34660 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
34663 \begin_layout Standard
34664 Math macros are described in the
34671 \begin_layout Subsection
34675 \begin_layout Standard
34676 Shows the outline window as described in sections
34677 \begin_inset space ~
34681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34683 reference "sec:Navigating"
34688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34690 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
34697 \begin_layout Subsection
34701 \begin_layout Standard
34702 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
34704 \begin_inset space ~
34708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34710 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34717 \begin_layout Subsection
34721 \begin_layout Standard
34722 Opens a window showing console messages.
34723 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
34725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34728 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
34729 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
34730 is processing the document.
34733 \begin_layout Subsection
34735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34737 name "subsec:Toolbars"
34742 \begin_inset Index idx
34745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34756 \begin_layout Standard
34757 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
34758 All toolbars and the
34761 \begin_inset space ~
34766 can be turned on and off.
34771 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
34783 \begin_inset space ~
34795 \begin_inset space ~
34800 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
34804 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
34811 \begin_layout Standard
34816 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
34820 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
34821 or when a certain feature is enabled.
34822 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
34823 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
34824 is inside a formula or table respectively.
34827 \begin_layout Standard
34829 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
34830 \begin_inset space ~
34834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34836 reference "sec:Toolbars"
34843 \begin_layout Subsection
34847 \begin_layout Standard
34851 \begin_inset space ~
34855 \begin_inset space ~
34859 \begin_inset space ~
34863 \begin_inset space ~
34867 \begin_inset space ~
34871 \begin_inset space ~
34876 will split \SpecialChar LyX
34877 's main window vertically while
34880 \begin_inset space ~
34884 \begin_inset space ~
34888 \begin_inset space ~
34892 \begin_inset space ~
34896 \begin_inset space ~
34900 \begin_inset space ~
34905 will split it horizontally.
34906 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
34907 to view the same document, but at different positions.
34908 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
34909 three or more documents at the same time.
34910 To close a split view, use the menu
34913 \begin_inset space ~
34917 \begin_inset space ~
34925 \begin_layout Subsection
34929 \begin_layout Standard
34930 Closes a split view.
34933 \begin_layout Subsection
34937 \begin_layout Standard
34938 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
34939 so that you will see nothing but your text.
34940 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
34941 's main window fullscreen.
34942 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
34943 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
34946 \begin_layout Section
34948 \begin_inset Index idx
34951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34962 \begin_layout Subsection
34966 \begin_layout Standard
34967 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
34968 \begin_inset space ~
34972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34974 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34985 \begin_layout Subsection
34987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34989 name "subsec:Special-Character"
34996 \begin_layout Standard
34997 Here you can insert the following characters:
35000 \begin_layout Description
35005 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35008 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35009 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35010 -packages you have installed.
35011 You can get a complete display by checking
35014 \begin_inset space ~
35020 \begin_inset Newline newline
35024 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35032 Not all characters will be visible in the
35036 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35044 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35048 ) can display every character.
35056 \begin_layout Description
35057 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35061 \begin_layout Description
35063 \begin_inset space ~
35067 \begin_inset space ~
35070 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35071 \begin_inset space ~
35075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35077 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35084 \begin_layout Description
35086 \begin_inset space ~
35089 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35092 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35093 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35099 \begin_layout Description
35101 \begin_inset space ~
35104 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35108 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35114 \begin_layout Description
35116 \begin_inset space ~
35119 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35123 \begin_layout Description
35125 \begin_inset space ~
35128 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35132 \begin_layout Description
35134 \begin_inset space ~
35137 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35143 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35149 \begin_layout Description
35151 \begin_inset space ~
35154 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35158 \begin_layout Description
35160 \begin_inset space ~
35164 \begin_inset Index idx
35167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35176 \begin_inset Index idx
35179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35182 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35187 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35188 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35190 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35196 \begin_inset Index idx
35199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35209 \begin_inset Newline newline
35212 More information about this feature can be found in the
35218 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
35224 \begin_layout Subsection
35228 \begin_layout Standard
35229 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35232 \begin_layout Description
35233 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35234 \begin_inset script superscript
35236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35247 \begin_layout Description
35248 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35249 \begin_inset script subscript
35251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35262 \begin_layout Description
35264 \begin_inset space ~
35267 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35268 \begin_inset space ~
35272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35274 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
35281 \begin_layout Description
35283 \begin_inset space ~
35286 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35287 \begin_inset space ~
35291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35293 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
35300 \begin_layout Description
35302 \begin_inset space ~
35305 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35306 \begin_inset space ~
35310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35312 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
35319 \begin_layout Description
35321 \begin_inset space ~
35324 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35330 \begin_inset space \space{}
35333 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35334 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
35340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35343 To insert a fraction use the command
35348 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35352 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35361 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35368 \begin_layout Description
35370 \begin_inset space ~
35373 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35374 \begin_inset space ~
35378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35380 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
35387 \begin_layout Description
35389 \begin_inset space ~
35392 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35393 \begin_inset space ~
35397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35399 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
35406 \begin_layout Description
35408 \begin_inset space ~
35411 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35412 \begin_inset space ~
35416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35418 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
35425 \begin_layout Description
35426 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35427 \begin_inset space ~
35431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35433 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
35440 \begin_layout Description
35442 \begin_inset space ~
35445 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35446 \begin_inset space ~
35450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35452 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
35459 \begin_layout Description
35461 \begin_inset space ~
35464 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35465 \begin_inset space ~
35469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35471 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
35478 \begin_layout Description
35480 \begin_inset space ~
35484 \begin_inset space ~
35487 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35488 \begin_inset space ~
35492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35494 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35501 \begin_layout Description
35503 \begin_inset space ~
35506 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35507 as described in section
35508 \begin_inset space ~
35512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35514 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35521 \begin_layout Description
35523 \begin_inset space ~
35526 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35527 \begin_inset space ~
35531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35533 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35540 \begin_layout Description
35542 \begin_inset space ~
35545 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
35546 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
35548 \begin_inset space ~
35552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35554 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35561 \begin_layout Description
35563 \begin_inset space ~
35566 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
35567 \begin_inset space ~
35571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35573 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35580 \begin_layout Description
35582 \begin_inset space ~
35586 \begin_inset space ~
35589 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
35590 \begin_inset space ~
35594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35596 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35603 \begin_layout Subsection
35607 \begin_layout Standard
35608 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35612 \begin_inset space ~
35633 are described in section
35634 \begin_inset space ~
35638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35640 reference "sec:toc"
35649 is described in section
35650 \begin_inset space ~
35654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35656 reference "sec:Index"
35664 is described in section
35665 \begin_inset space ~
35669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35671 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35677 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35680 is described in section
35681 \begin_inset space ~
35685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35687 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35694 \begin_layout Subsection
35698 \begin_layout Standard
35699 To insert floats, as described in section
35700 \begin_inset space ~
35704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35706 reference "sec:Floats"
35710 and in detail the chapter
35717 \begin_inset space ~
35725 \begin_layout Subsection
35729 \begin_layout Standard
35730 To insert notes, described in section
35731 \begin_inset space ~
35735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35737 reference "sec:Notes"
35744 \begin_layout Subsection
35748 \begin_layout Standard
35749 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
35751 Branches are described in section
35752 \begin_inset space ~
35756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35758 reference "sec:Branches"
35765 \begin_layout Subsection
35769 \begin_layout Standard
35770 Inserts document class-specific insets.
35771 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
35773 An example is the document class
35774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35781 with three custom insets.
35784 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35788 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
35794 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
35797 \begin_layout Subsection
35799 \begin_inset Index idx
35802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35813 \begin_layout Standard
35814 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
35816 For more information see chapter
35818 External Document Parts
35821 \begin_inset space ~
35827 \begin_layout Subsection
35829 \begin_inset Index idx
35832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35843 \begin_layout Standard
35844 Inserts a box in a certain style.
35845 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
35852 \begin_inset space ~
35860 \begin_layout Subsection
35864 \begin_layout Standard
35869 dialog as described in section
35870 \begin_inset space ~
35874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35876 reference "sec:Bibliography"
35883 \begin_layout Subsection
35887 \begin_layout Standard
35892 as described in section
35893 \begin_inset space ~
35897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35899 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35906 \begin_layout Subsection
35910 \begin_layout Standard
35915 as described in section
35916 \begin_inset space ~
35920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35922 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35929 \begin_layout Subsection
35931 \begin_inset Index idx
35934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35943 \begin_inset Index idx
35946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35949 Longtables ! Caption
35957 \begin_layout Standard
35958 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
35959 Floats are described in section
35960 \begin_inset space ~
35964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35966 reference "sec:Floats"
35970 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
35977 \begin_inset space ~
35985 \begin_layout Subsection
35989 \begin_layout Standard
35990 Inserts an index entry as described in section
35991 \begin_inset space ~
35995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35997 reference "sec:Index"
36004 \begin_layout Subsection
36008 \begin_layout Standard
36009 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36010 \begin_inset space ~
36014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36016 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36023 \begin_layout Subsection
36027 \begin_layout Standard
36028 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36029 Tables are described in section
36030 \begin_inset space ~
36034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36036 reference "sec:Tables"
36040 and in detail in the chapter
36047 \begin_inset space ~
36055 \begin_layout Subsection
36059 \begin_layout Standard
36065 Graphics are described in section
36066 \begin_inset space ~
36070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36072 reference "sec:Graphics"
36079 \begin_layout Subsection
36083 \begin_layout Standard
36084 Inserts a URL as described in section
36085 \begin_inset space ~
36089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36091 reference "subsec:URLs"
36098 \begin_layout Subsection
36102 \begin_layout Standard
36103 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36104 \begin_inset space ~
36108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36110 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36117 \begin_layout Subsection
36121 \begin_layout Standard
36122 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36123 \begin_inset space ~
36127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36129 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36136 \begin_layout Subsection
36140 \begin_layout Standard
36141 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36142 \begin_inset space ~
36146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36148 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36155 \begin_layout Subsection
36159 \begin_layout Standard
36160 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36161 title or caption of a float.
36162 Inserts a short title as described in section
36163 \begin_inset space ~
36167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36169 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36176 \begin_layout Subsection
36181 \begin_layout Standard
36182 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36183 Code box as described in section
36184 \begin_inset space ~
36188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36190 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36197 \begin_layout Subsection
36199 \begin_inset Index idx
36202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36213 \begin_layout Standard
36214 Inserts a program listings box.
36215 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36217 Program Code Listings
36222 \begin_inset space ~
36230 \begin_layout Subsection
36234 \begin_layout Standard
36235 Inserts the actual date.
36236 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36240 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36248 \begin_inset space ~
36256 \begin_layout Subsection
36260 \begin_layout Standard
36261 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36262 \begin_inset space ~
36266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36268 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36275 \begin_layout Section
36277 \begin_inset Index idx
36280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36291 \begin_layout Standard
36292 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36293 \begin_inset space ~
36296 of the current document.
36297 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36300 \begin_layout Subsection
36304 \begin_layout Standard
36305 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36306 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36307 to jump, for example, between section
36308 \begin_inset space ~
36312 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36313 \begin_inset space ~
36316 2.5 and use the submenu
36319 \begin_inset space ~
36323 \begin_inset space ~
36330 \begin_inset space ~
36336 \begin_inset space ~
36340 \begin_inset space ~
36346 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36350 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36356 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36359 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36362 \begin_layout Standard
36363 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36367 \begin_inset space ~
36372 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36375 \begin_inset space ~
36380 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36383 \begin_layout Subsection
36384 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36387 \begin_layout Standard
36388 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36392 \begin_layout Subsection
36396 \begin_layout Standard
36397 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36398 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36399 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36403 \begin_inset space ~
36407 \begin_inset space ~
36415 \begin_layout Subsection
36419 \begin_layout Standard
36420 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36423 The \SpecialChar LyX
36424 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36434 \begin_inset space ~
36439 manual for a detailed description.
36442 \begin_layout Section
36444 \begin_inset Index idx
36447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36458 \begin_layout Subsection
36462 \begin_layout Standard
36463 Change Tracking is described in section
36464 \begin_inset space ~
36468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36470 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36477 \begin_layout Subsection
36481 \begin_layout Standard
36482 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
36483 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
36484 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36486 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36487 to the clipboard or update the view.
36488 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36492 \begin_layout Subsection
36493 Start Appendix Here
36496 \begin_layout Standard
36497 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36498 as described in section
36499 \begin_inset space ~
36503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36505 reference "sec:Appendices"
36512 \begin_layout Subsection
36514 \begin_inset space ~
36520 \begin_layout Standard
36521 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36522 default output format for the document (menu
36524 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36525 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36526 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36528 \begin_inset space ~
36532 \begin_inset space ~
36538 \begin_inset space ~
36542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36544 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36548 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
36551 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36552 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36554 \begin_inset space ~
36557 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36559 \begin_inset space ~
36562 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36564 \begin_inset space ~
36568 \begin_inset space ~
36574 \begin_inset space ~
36578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36580 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36584 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
36585 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36587 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36588 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36590 \begin_inset space ~
36593 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36595 \begin_inset space ~
36598 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36602 \begin_inset space ~
36606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36608 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36613 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
36614 when it is first configured.
36615 The default output format is
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36626 \begin_layout Subsection
36627 View (Other Formats)
36630 \begin_layout Standard
36631 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
36632 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
36633 actual document with an external program.
36634 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
36635 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36636 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
36638 All possible formats are listed in section
36639 \begin_inset space ~
36643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36645 reference "subsec:Export"
36650 You should at least see the menu entry
36655 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36657 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
36659 \begin_inset space ~
36663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36665 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36670 \begin_inset Index idx
36673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36676 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
36685 \begin_layout Standard
36686 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
36687 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36689 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36690 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36692 \begin_inset space ~
36695 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36697 \begin_inset space ~
36700 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36704 \begin_inset space ~
36708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36710 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36715 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
36716 when it is first configured.
36719 \begin_layout Subsection
36721 \begin_inset space ~
36727 \begin_layout Standard
36728 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
36729 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
36732 \begin_layout Subsection
36733 Update (Other Formats)
36736 \begin_layout Standard
36737 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
36738 your document without opening a new viewer window.
36741 \begin_layout Subsection
36742 View Master Document
36745 \begin_layout Standard
36746 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36762 \begin_inset space ~
36767 manual for more information on this topic).
36768 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
36769 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
36773 \begin_inset space ~
36777 \begin_inset space ~
36782 generates the output of the whole book, while
36786 will just output the chapter alone.
36789 \begin_layout Standard
36790 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
36791 in the document settings (menu
36793 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36794 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36795 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36797 \begin_inset space ~
36801 \begin_inset space ~
36807 \begin_inset space ~
36811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36813 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36817 ) or in the preferences (menu
36819 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36820 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36822 \begin_inset space ~
36825 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36827 \begin_inset space ~
36830 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36832 \begin_inset space ~
36836 \begin_inset space ~
36842 \begin_inset space ~
36846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36848 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36855 \begin_layout Subsection
36856 Update Master Document
36859 \begin_layout Standard
36860 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36876 \begin_inset space ~
36881 manual for more information on this topic).
36882 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
36883 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
36886 \begin_layout Standard
36887 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
36888 in the document settings (menu
36890 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36891 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36892 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36894 \begin_inset space ~
36898 \begin_inset space ~
36904 \begin_inset space ~
36908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36910 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36914 ) or in the preferences (menu
36916 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36917 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36919 \begin_inset space ~
36922 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36924 \begin_inset space ~
36927 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36929 \begin_inset space ~
36933 \begin_inset space ~
36939 \begin_inset space ~
36943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36945 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36952 \begin_layout Subsection
36954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36956 name "subsec:Compressed"
36963 \begin_layout Standard
36964 Un/compresses the current document.
36965 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
36966 compression (see the
36968 Additional Features
36970 manual for details).
36973 \begin_layout Subsection
36977 \begin_layout Standard
36978 The document settings are described in appendix
36979 \begin_inset space ~
36983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36985 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
36992 \begin_layout Section
36994 \begin_inset Index idx
36997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37008 \begin_layout Subsection
37012 \begin_layout Standard
37013 Spell checking is explained in section
37014 \begin_inset space ~
37018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37020 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37027 \begin_layout Subsection
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 The thesaurus is described in section
37033 \begin_inset space ~
37037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37039 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37046 \begin_layout Subsection
37048 \begin_inset Index idx
37051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37060 \begin_inset Index idx
37063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37074 \begin_layout Standard
37075 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37076 the highlighted document part.
37079 \begin_layout Subsection
37081 \begin_inset Index idx
37084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37087 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37096 \begin_layout Standard
37097 Generates with the help of the program
37099 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37102 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37103 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37104 This feature is not available on Windows.
37107 \begin_layout Subsection
37109 \begin_inset Index idx
37112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37124 \begin_layout Standard
37125 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37130 \begin_inset space ~
37135 to see the full filename paths.
37138 \begin_layout Subsection
37140 \begin_inset Index idx
37143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37154 \begin_layout Standard
37155 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37156 files as described in section
37157 \begin_inset space ~
37161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37163 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37170 \begin_layout Subsection
37172 \begin_inset Index idx
37175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37190 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37208 \begin_inset Index idx
37211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37214 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37223 \begin_layout Standard
37224 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
37225 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
37226 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37227 -packages and programs it needs; see
37229 \begin_inset space ~
37233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37235 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37242 \begin_layout Subsection
37246 \begin_layout Standard
37251 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37258 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37265 \begin_layout Section
37267 \begin_inset Index idx
37270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37281 \begin_layout Standard
37282 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
37283 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
37285 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37289 \begin_layout Standard
37294 \begin_inset space ~
37299 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
37300 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37301 packages and classes found
37302 by \SpecialChar LyX
37304 \begin_inset space ~
37308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37310 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37317 \begin_layout Standard
37321 \begin_inset space ~
37326 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
37331 \begin_layout Section
37333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37335 name "sec:Toolbars"
37342 \begin_layout Standard
37343 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37344 \begin_inset space ~
37348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37350 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
37357 \begin_layout Standard
37358 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37359 This is described in the
37361 Additional Features
37366 \begin_layout Subsection
37368 \begin_inset Index idx
37371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37382 \begin_layout Standard
37383 \begin_inset Graphics
37384 filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37392 \begin_layout Standard
37393 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37399 \begin_layout Standard
37400 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37417 \begin_inset Note Note
37420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37423 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37428 manual for more information.
37436 \begin_layout Standard
37437 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37443 \begin_layout Standard
37444 \begin_inset Tabular
37445 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37446 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37447 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37448 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37454 \begin_inset Graphics
37455 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37469 pull-down box for the environments
37482 \begin_layout Standard
37483 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37489 \begin_layout Standard
37491 \begin_inset Tabular
37492 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37493 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37494 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37495 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37496 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37519 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37526 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37549 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37556 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37579 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37586 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37595 arg "dialog-show print"
37603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37609 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37616 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37625 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37639 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37669 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37676 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37699 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37729 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37736 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37759 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37789 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37796 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37805 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
37813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37819 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37838 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37845 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37859 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37878 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37887 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
37895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37901 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37902 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
37909 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37930 Emphasize text, function of the
37932 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37934 \begin_inset space ~
37937 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
37946 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37967 Set text to noun style, function of the
37969 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37971 \begin_inset space ~
37974 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
37983 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37992 arg "textstyle-apply"
38000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38004 Format text using the current settings in the
38006 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38008 \begin_inset space ~
38011 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38020 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38043 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38044 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38046 \begin_inset space ~
38055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38064 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38092 arg "tabular-insert"
38100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38106 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38113 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38122 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38134 Toggle outline window on/off,
38136 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38143 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38152 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38164 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38179 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38191 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38204 \begin_layout Subsection
38206 \begin_inset Index idx
38209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38220 \begin_layout Standard
38221 \begin_inset Graphics
38222 filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38230 \begin_layout Standard
38231 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38237 \begin_layout Standard
38238 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38242 \begin_layout Standard
38243 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38249 \begin_layout Standard
38250 \begin_inset Tabular
38251 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38252 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38253 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38254 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38255 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38291 arg "layout Enumerate"
38299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38309 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38318 arg "layout Itemize"
38326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38336 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38372 arg "layout Description"
38380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38399 arg "depth-increment"
38407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38413 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38415 \begin_inset space ~
38419 \begin_inset space ~
38428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38437 arg "depth-decrement"
38445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38451 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38453 \begin_inset space ~
38457 \begin_inset space ~
38466 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38475 arg "float-insert figure"
38483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38489 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38490 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
38497 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38506 arg "float-insert table"
38514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38521 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
38528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38551 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38567 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38588 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38597 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38611 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38618 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38643 \begin_inset space ~
38652 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38661 arg "nomencl-insert"
38669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38677 \begin_inset space ~
38686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38695 arg "footnote-insert"
38703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38716 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38725 arg "marginalnote-insert"
38733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38739 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38741 \begin_inset space ~
38750 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38774 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38776 \begin_inset space ~
38785 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38794 arg "box-insert Frameless"
38802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38808 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38815 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38838 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38845 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38870 \begin_inset space ~
38879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38888 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
38896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38902 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38903 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38910 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38919 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
38927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38933 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38934 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38936 \begin_inset space ~
38945 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38954 arg "dialog-show character"
38962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38968 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38970 \begin_inset space ~
38973 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38989 arg "layout-paragraph"
38997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39003 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39005 \begin_inset space ~
39014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39023 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39037 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39051 \begin_layout Subsection
39052 View/Update Toolbar
39053 \begin_inset Index idx
39056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39059 Toolbar ! View / Update
39067 \begin_layout Standard
39068 \begin_inset Graphics
39069 filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39076 \begin_layout Standard
39077 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39083 \begin_layout Standard
39084 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39088 \begin_layout Standard
39089 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39095 \begin_layout Standard
39096 \begin_inset Tabular
39097 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39098 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39099 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39100 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39140 arg "buffer-update"
39148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39170 arg "master-buffer-view"
39178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39184 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39186 \begin_inset space ~
39195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39204 arg "master-buffer-update"
39212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39220 \begin_inset space ~
39224 \begin_inset space ~
39233 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39242 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39256 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39257 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39258 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39259 Synchronize with Output
39265 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39270 \begin_inset Graphics
39271 filename ../../images/view-others.svgz
39273 groupId toolbarbuttons
39284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39290 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39291 View (Other Formats)
39297 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39302 \begin_inset Graphics
39303 filename ../../images/update-others.svgz
39305 groupId toolbarbuttons
39314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39320 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39321 Update (Other Formats)
39334 \begin_layout Standard
39335 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39339 \begin_layout Subsection
39343 \begin_layout Standard
39344 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39345 \begin_inset space ~
39349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39351 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39355 , the table toolbar
39356 \begin_inset Index idx
39359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39370 \begin_inset space ~
39375 manual and the math macro toolbar
39376 \begin_inset Index idx
39379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39394 \begin_layout Chapter
39395 The Document Settings
39396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39398 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39403 \begin_inset Index idx
39406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39409 Document ! Settings
39417 \begin_layout Standard
39421 \begin_inset space ~
39426 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39427 is called with the menu
39429 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39433 You can save your document settings as default with the
39435 Save as Document Defaults
39437 button in any dialog.
39438 This will create a template named
39442 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
39443 when you create a new document without
39447 \begin_layout Standard
39452 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39453 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39456 \begin_layout Standard
39457 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39458 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39459 to find the one you are looking for.
39460 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
39461 the submenus of the dialog.
39463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39467 \begin_inset space \space{}
39471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39478 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39479 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39480 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39483 \begin_layout Section
39487 \begin_layout Standard
39488 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39490 Document classes are described in section
39491 \begin_inset space ~
39495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39497 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39505 \begin_layout Standard
39509 \begin_inset space ~
39514 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
39519 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
39520 as a layout for a document class.
39521 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39523 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39532 \begin_layout Standard
39533 Some classes use special class options by default.
39534 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39538 and you can decide to use them or not.
39539 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39540 recommended you leave them untouched.
39545 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39546 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39551 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39553 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39559 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39560 \begin_inset Newline newline
39565 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39568 \begin_inset Newline newline
39571 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39572 distribution, see section
39577 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39579 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39592 \begin_layout Standard
39597 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39598 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
39599 in the background if the child document
39600 is opened without its master.
39601 This way child documents are always compilable.
39602 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
39609 \begin_inset space ~
39617 \begin_layout Standard
39618 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39629 \begin_inset Index idx
39632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39636 -packages ! prettyref
39642 \begin_inset Index idx
39645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39649 -packages ! refstyle
39654 for cross-references, see section
39655 \begin_inset space ~
39659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39661 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39668 \begin_layout Section
39672 \begin_layout Standard
39673 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
39674 Please refer to the section
39677 \begin_inset space ~
39685 \begin_inset space ~
39690 manual for details.
39693 \begin_layout Section
39697 \begin_layout Standard
39698 Modules are explained in section
39699 \begin_inset space ~
39703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39705 reference "subsec:Modules"
39712 \begin_layout Section
39716 \begin_layout Standard
39718 \begin_inset space ~
39722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39724 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
39731 \begin_layout Section
39735 \begin_layout Standard
39736 The document font settings are described in section
39737 \begin_inset space ~
39741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39743 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
39750 \begin_layout Section
39754 \begin_layout Standard
39755 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
39767 \begin_inset space ~
39772 and whether it should be a
39775 \begin_inset space ~
39780 can also be specified here.
39783 \begin_layout Standard
39784 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
39785 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
39786 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
39788 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
39791 \begin_layout Standard
39794 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
39797 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
39798 justifies the text on screen.
39799 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
39803 \begin_layout Section
39807 \begin_layout Standard
39808 This dialog is described in sections
39809 \begin_inset space ~
39813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39815 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
39820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39822 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
39829 \begin_layout Section
39833 \begin_layout Standard
39834 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
39835 \begin_inset space ~
39839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39841 reference "subsec:Margins"
39848 \begin_layout Section
39850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39852 name "sec:Language-encodings"
39857 \begin_inset Index idx
39860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39863 Language ! Encoding
39871 \begin_layout Standard
39872 The document language and quote styles are set here.
39873 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
39874 (the \SpecialChar LyX
39876 is always encoded in utf8).
39877 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
39878 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
39879 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
39880 -command is not known for
39881 a particular character).
39884 \begin_layout Standard
39885 If you use the option
39890 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
39891 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
39892 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39894 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
39895 exactly one encoding.
39896 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
39899 \begin_layout Standard
39901 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
39902 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
39903 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39904 installation supports Unicode), choose
39905 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
39906 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
39907 is quite incomplete, so
39908 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
39913 (when \SpecialChar LyX
39914 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
39915 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
39916 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
39917 -commands is not used, because all
39918 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
39919 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
39920 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39921 , two new alternative engines
39922 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
39924 Both engines support Unicode natively.
39926 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
39929 \begin_inset space ~
39937 \begin_inset space ~
39945 \begin_inset space ~
39951 \begin_inset space ~
39955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39957 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39962 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
39966 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
39969 \begin_layout Standard
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39978 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39979 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
39981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39989 The possible settings are:
39992 \begin_layout Description
39993 Default uses the language package that is selected in
39995 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39996 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40000 \begin_inset space ~
40004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40006 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40013 \begin_layout Description
40014 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40015 format you will use.
40016 In many cases this will be
40021 \begin_inset Index idx
40024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40034 If the newer package
40039 \begin_inset Index idx
40042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40046 -packages ! polyglossia
40051 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40052 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40053 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40055 this package will be used instead of
40062 \begin_layout Description
40064 \begin_inset space ~
40075 would be more appropriate.
40078 \begin_layout Description
40079 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40080 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40084 (for German texts), type in
40087 \begin_inset Newline newline
40092 usepackage{ngerman}
40095 \begin_layout Description
40096 None will not use a language package.
40097 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40100 \begin_layout Standard
40101 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40104 \begin_layout Description
40106 \begin_inset space ~
40110 \begin_inset space ~
40114 \begin_inset space ~
40121 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40127 \begin_inset Index idx
40130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40134 -packages ! inputenc
40140 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40141 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40142 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40146 \begin_layout Description
40147 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40149 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40150 commands, which may result in a big
40151 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40152 -commands are needed.
40155 \begin_layout Description
40157 \begin_inset space ~
40161 \begin_inset space ~
40164 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40167 \begin_layout Description
40169 \begin_inset space ~
40173 \begin_inset space ~
40176 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40179 \begin_layout Description
40181 \begin_inset space ~
40184 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40187 \begin_layout Description
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40193 \begin_inset space ~
40196 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40197 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40200 \begin_layout Description
40202 \begin_inset space ~
40206 \begin_inset space ~
40209 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40213 \begin_layout Description
40215 \begin_inset space ~
40219 \begin_inset space ~
40222 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40223 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40226 \begin_layout Description
40228 \begin_inset space ~
40232 \begin_inset space ~
40236 \begin_inset space ~
40239 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40240 \begin_inset space ~
40246 \begin_layout Description
40248 \begin_inset space ~
40252 \begin_inset space ~
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40259 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40260 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40263 \begin_layout Description
40265 \begin_inset space ~
40269 \begin_inset space ~
40272 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40273 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40274 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40275 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40276 \begin_inset space ~
40280 \begin_inset space ~
40286 \begin_layout Description
40288 \begin_inset space ~
40292 \begin_inset space ~
40295 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40296 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40297 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40299 should try to use the encoding Unicode
40300 \begin_inset space ~
40304 \begin_inset space ~
40310 \begin_layout Description
40312 \begin_inset space ~
40316 \begin_inset space ~
40319 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40322 \begin_layout Description
40324 \begin_inset space ~
40328 \begin_inset space ~
40331 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40334 \begin_layout Description
40336 \begin_inset space ~
40340 \begin_inset space ~
40343 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40346 \begin_layout Description
40348 \begin_inset space ~
40351 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40354 \begin_layout Description
40356 \begin_inset space ~
40359 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40362 \begin_layout Description
40364 \begin_inset space ~
40368 \begin_inset space ~
40371 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40374 \begin_layout Description
40376 \begin_inset space ~
40380 \begin_inset space ~
40386 \begin_layout Description
40388 \begin_inset space ~
40392 \begin_inset space ~
40395 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40398 \begin_layout Description
40400 \begin_inset space ~
40404 \begin_inset space ~
40410 \begin_layout Description
40412 \begin_inset space ~
40416 \begin_inset space ~
40419 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40425 \begin_inset Index idx
40428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40437 , when using this, set the document language to
40442 \begin_layout Description
40444 \begin_inset space ~
40448 \begin_inset space ~
40451 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40456 , when using this, set the document language to
40459 \begin_inset space ~
40465 \begin_layout Description
40467 \begin_inset space ~
40471 \begin_inset space ~
40474 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40480 \begin_inset Index idx
40483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40487 -packages ! japanese
40492 , when using this, set the document language to
40497 \begin_layout Description
40499 \begin_inset space ~
40503 \begin_inset space ~
40506 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40511 , when using this, set the document language to
40516 \begin_layout Description
40518 \begin_inset space ~
40522 \begin_inset space ~
40525 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40530 , when using this, set the document language to
40535 \begin_layout Description
40537 \begin_inset space ~
40540 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40543 \begin_layout Description
40545 \begin_inset space ~
40549 \begin_inset space ~
40553 \begin_inset space ~
40556 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40559 \begin_layout Description
40561 \begin_inset space ~
40565 \begin_inset space ~
40569 \begin_inset space ~
40572 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40573 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40574 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40577 \begin_layout Description
40579 \begin_inset space ~
40583 \begin_inset space ~
40589 \begin_layout Description
40591 \begin_inset space ~
40595 \begin_inset space ~
40598 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40599 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40602 \begin_layout Description
40604 \begin_inset space ~
40608 \begin_inset space ~
40611 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40617 \begin_inset Index idx
40620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40629 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
40632 \begin_layout Description
40634 \begin_inset space ~
40638 \begin_inset space ~
40641 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
40648 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40651 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40658 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40659 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40661 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
40664 \begin_layout Description
40666 \begin_inset space ~
40670 \begin_inset space ~
40673 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40679 \begin_inset Index idx
40682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40691 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
40694 \begin_layout Description
40696 \begin_inset space ~
40699 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40705 \begin_inset Index idx
40708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40712 -packages ! inputenc
40718 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
40722 \begin_layout Description
40724 \begin_inset space ~
40728 \begin_inset space ~
40732 \begin_inset space ~
40735 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
40736 \begin_inset space ~
40742 \begin_layout Description
40744 \begin_inset space ~
40748 \begin_inset space ~
40752 \begin_inset space ~
40755 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
40756 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
40757 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
40761 \begin_layout Description
40763 \begin_inset space ~
40767 \begin_inset space ~
40771 \begin_inset space ~
40774 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
40775 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
40778 \begin_layout Section
40780 \begin_inset Index idx
40783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40792 \begin_inset Index idx
40795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40804 \begin_inset Index idx
40807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40810 Color ! Shaded boxes
40816 \begin_inset Index idx
40819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40822 Color ! Greyed-out notes
40830 \begin_layout Standard
40831 Here you can alter the font color for the
40835 (default: black), for
40838 \begin_inset space ~
40843 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
40847 (default: white) and for
40850 \begin_inset space ~
40860 sets the color back to the default.
40863 \begin_layout Standard
40864 Clicking any button showing
40872 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
40873 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
40874 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
40875 later more quickly.
40878 \begin_layout Standard
40879 Note, if you change the
40882 \begin_inset space ~
40887 font color and use the option
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40895 in the document settings under
40898 \begin_inset space ~
40903 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
40904 \begin_inset space ~
40908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40910 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
40917 \begin_layout Standard
40918 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40924 \begin_layout Standard
40928 \begin_inset space ~
40937 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40943 Code after a forced page break:
40946 \begin_layout Itemize
40947 For the page color:
40948 \begin_inset Newline newline
40955 pagecolor{color name}
40958 \begin_layout Itemize
40959 For the text color:
40960 \begin_inset Newline newline
40970 \begin_layout Standard
40971 You are restricted to one of
41007 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41014 \begin_inset space ~
41020 \begin_inset Newline newline
41023 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41024 names to refer to them:
41027 \begin_layout Itemize
41033 \begin_inset Newline newline
41038 page_backgroundcolor
41041 \begin_layout Itemize
41045 \begin_inset space ~
41051 \begin_inset Newline newline
41059 \begin_layout Itemize
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41069 \begin_inset Newline newline
41077 \begin_layout Itemize
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41087 \begin_inset Newline newline
41095 \begin_layout Standard
41096 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41099 \begin_inset space ~
41107 \begin_inset space ~
41115 \begin_layout Section
41119 \begin_layout Standard
41120 Here you can adjust the
41124 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41128 as described in section
41129 \begin_inset space ~
41133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41135 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41142 \begin_layout Section
41146 \begin_layout Standard
41147 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41153 \begin_inset Index idx
41156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41170 \begin_inset Index idx
41173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41177 -packages ! jurabib
41185 Sectioned bibliography
41187 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41193 \begin_inset Index idx
41196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41200 -packages ! bibtopic
41205 and you can select a
41209 for the generation of the bibliography.
41210 For a further description see section
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41217 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41224 \begin_layout Section
41228 \begin_layout Standard
41229 Here you can define the
41233 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41235 \begin_inset space ~
41239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41241 reference "sec:Index"
41248 \begin_layout Section
41252 \begin_layout Standard
41253 The PDF properties are explained in section
41254 \begin_inset space ~
41258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41260 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41267 \begin_layout Section
41271 \begin_layout Standard
41272 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
41273 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41279 \begin_inset Index idx
41282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41286 -packages ! amsmath
41296 \begin_inset Index idx
41299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41303 -packages ! amssymb
41313 \begin_inset Index idx
41316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41330 \begin_inset Index idx
41333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41347 \begin_inset Index idx
41350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41354 -packages ! mathdots
41364 \begin_inset Index idx
41367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41371 -packages ! mathtools
41381 \begin_inset Index idx
41384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41398 \begin_inset Index idx
41401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41405 -packages ! stackrel
41415 \begin_inset Index idx
41418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41422 -packages ! stmaryrd
41432 \begin_inset Index idx
41435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41439 -packages ! undertilde
41444 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41447 \begin_layout Description
41448 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
41449 -errors in formulas,
41450 ensure that you have this enabled.
41453 \begin_layout Description
41454 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
41455 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
41456 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
41460 \begin_layout Description
41461 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
41464 \begin_inset space ~
41476 \begin_layout Description
41477 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41480 \begin_inset space ~
41492 \begin_layout Description
41493 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41504 \begin_layout Description
41505 mathtools is used for the math commands
41541 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
41548 \begin_layout Description
41549 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41551 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41560 \begin_layout Description
41561 stackrel is used for the math command
41578 \begin_layout Description
41579 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
41582 \begin_layout Description
41583 undertilde is used for the math command
41591 Accents for one Character
41600 \begin_layout Section
41604 \begin_layout Standard
41605 The float placement options are described in the section
41608 \begin_inset space ~
41616 \begin_inset space ~
41624 \begin_layout Section
41628 \begin_layout Standard
41629 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41631 Program Code Listings
41636 \begin_inset space ~
41644 \begin_layout Section
41648 \begin_layout Standard
41649 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41657 set to be used and set the
41662 The itemize environment is described in section
41663 \begin_inset space ~
41667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41669 reference "sec:Itemize"
41676 \begin_layout Standard
41677 You can furthermore specify a
41680 \begin_inset space ~
41685 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41686 command of the desired character.
41687 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41694 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41696 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41700 \begin_inset space \space{}
41704 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41714 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41715 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41718 \begin_layout Standard
41719 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41727 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41728 -packages in the preamble (menu
41731 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41732 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41735 \begin_inset space ~
41741 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41745 usepackage{textcomp}
41748 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41752 usepackage{amssymb}
41762 \begin_layout Section
41766 \begin_layout Standard
41767 Branches are described in section
41768 \begin_inset space ~
41772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41774 reference "sec:Branches"
41781 \begin_layout Section
41783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41785 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41792 \begin_layout Standard
41793 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41796 \begin_layout Description
41798 \begin_inset space ~
41802 \begin_inset space ~
41805 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41825 View Master Document
41826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41833 Update Master Document
41834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41841 menu or the toolbar.
41842 The default is set in
41844 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41845 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41847 \begin_inset space ~
41850 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41854 \begin_inset space ~
41858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41860 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41867 \begin_layout Description
41869 \begin_inset space ~
41873 \begin_inset space ~
41876 Output settings for the menu
41878 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41880 \begin_inset space ~
41886 For a detailed description see section
41888 Reverse DVI/PDF search
41893 \begin_inset space ~
41901 \begin_layout Description
41903 \begin_inset space ~
41907 \begin_inset space ~
41910 Options offers settings for the export format
41918 \begin_inset space ~
41923 will assure that the output follows exactly version
41924 \begin_inset space ~
41927 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
41931 \begin_inset space ~
41936 settings are described in detail in section
41938 Math Output in XHTML
41943 \begin_inset space ~
41952 \begin_inset space ~
41956 \begin_inset space ~
41961 is used for the size of equations in the output.
41964 \begin_layout Section
41968 \begin_layout Standard
41969 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41971 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
41973 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41975 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
41979 \begin_layout Standard
41980 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41981 -syntax is given in section
41982 \begin_inset space ~
41986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41988 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
41995 \begin_layout Chapter
41996 The Preferences Dialog
41997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41999 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42004 \begin_inset Index idx
42007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42018 \begin_layout Standard
42019 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42021 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42025 It has the following submenus.
42028 \begin_layout Section
42032 \begin_layout Subsection
42036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42037 User Interface File
42038 \begin_inset Index idx
42041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42044 Customization ! of toolbars
42050 \begin_inset Index idx
42053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42056 Customization ! of menus
42064 \begin_layout Standard
42065 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42066 interface (ui) file.
42067 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42075 \begin_layout Description
42080 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42083 \begin_layout Description
42090 the menu entries in popup context menus
42093 \begin_layout Description
42098 specifies the toolbar buttons
42101 \begin_layout Standard
42102 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42103 and edit the entries.
42106 \begin_layout Standard
42107 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42119 entries must be finished with an explicit
42144 and in the case of the
42145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42157 The syntax for the entries is:
42160 \begin_layout Standard
42161 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42190 \begin_layout Standard
42192 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42195 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42196 -functions are listed in the menu
42198 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42200 \begin_inset space ~
42208 \begin_layout Standard
42209 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42215 \begin_layout Standard
42216 For example, assuming you use the menu
42218 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42221 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42225 \begin_layout Standard
42226 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42250 \begin_layout Standard
42252 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42267 to have the sixth bookmark.
42270 \begin_layout Standard
42274 \begin_inset space ~
42279 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
42280 's toolbar buttons.
42281 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42282 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42285 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42293 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42297 \begin_layout Standard
42300 Enable tool tips in main work area
42302 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42306 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42310 \begin_layout Standard
42315 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
42316 should display in the menu
42318 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42320 \begin_inset space ~
42328 \begin_layout Subsection
42332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42336 \begin_layout Standard
42339 Restore window layouts and geometries
42342 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
42343 the last \SpecialChar LyX
42347 \begin_layout Standard
42350 Restore cursor positions
42352 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42356 \begin_layout Standard
42359 Load opened files from last session
42361 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
42365 \begin_layout Standard
42368 Clear all session information
42370 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
42371 sessions (cursor positions, names
42372 of last opened documents, etc.).
42375 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42379 name "subsec:Backup documents"
42384 \begin_inset Index idx
42387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42398 \begin_layout Standard
42401 Backup original documents when saving
42403 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42404 it was saved the last time.
42405 It is stored in the
42408 \begin_inset space ~
42414 \begin_inset space ~
42418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42420 reference "sec:Paths"
42424 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42427 \begin_inset space ~
42433 The backup file has the file extension
42434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42448 \begin_layout Standard
42451 Backup documents, every
42453 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42456 \begin_layout Standard
42459 Save documents compressed by default
42461 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
42462 \begin_inset space ~
42466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42468 reference "subsec:Compressed"
42473 This applies to newly created documents only.
42474 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
42477 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42478 Windows & work area
42481 \begin_layout Standard
42484 Open documents in tabs
42486 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
42490 \begin_layout Standard
42495 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
42500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42508 reference "sec:Paths"
42512 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
42519 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
42520 documents will be opened in the same running instance
42521 of \SpecialChar LyX
42523 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
42524 instance is created for each file.
42527 \begin_layout Standard
42530 Single close-tab button
42532 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42535 \begin_inset Graphics
42536 filename ../../images/closetab.svgz
42543 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42544 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42547 \begin_layout Standard
42548 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42556 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
42557 before the change takes effect.
42565 \begin_layout Standard
42570 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
42572 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
42574 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
42578 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
42579 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
42580 and only want to close the view in once instance.
42583 \begin_layout Subsection
42585 \begin_inset Index idx
42588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42599 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
42606 \begin_layout Standard
42607 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
42611 \begin_layout Standard
42612 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42620 This section only deals with the fonts
42624 the \SpecialChar LyX
42626 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42629 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42630 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42641 \begin_layout Standard
42642 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
42659 (depends on the system) as its
42662 \begin_inset space ~
42678 \begin_layout Standard
42679 You can change the font size with the
42686 \begin_layout Standard
42691 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42696 points have the size of 1
42697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42701 \begin_inset space ~
42705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42707 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42712 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42717 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42718 \begin_inset space ~
42722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42724 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
42731 \begin_layout Standard
42734 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42736 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
42737 needs to redraw the screen less often.
42738 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42739 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42740 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42742 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42743 \begin_inset space ~
42749 \begin_layout Subsection
42751 \begin_inset Index idx
42754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42757 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
42764 \begin_inset Index idx
42767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42778 \begin_layout Standard
42779 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
42780 by choosing an item in the
42781 list and selecting the
42788 \begin_layout Standard
42789 By checking the option
42793 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42796 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42797 \begin_inset space ~
42801 \begin_inset space ~
42806 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42809 \begin_layout Subsection
42811 \begin_inset Index idx
42814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42825 \begin_layout Standard
42826 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
42830 \begin_layout Standard
42835 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42836 This feature is described in section
42837 \begin_inset space ~
42841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42843 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42850 \begin_layout Standard
42851 Checking the option
42854 \begin_inset space ~
42858 \begin_inset space ~
42862 \begin_inset space ~
42867 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42870 \begin_layout Section
42872 \begin_inset Index idx
42875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42886 \begin_layout Subsection
42890 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42894 \begin_layout Standard
42897 Cursor follows scrollbar
42899 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42903 \begin_layout Standard
42904 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42905 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42906 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42909 \begin_layout Standard
42912 Scroll below end of document
42914 is self-explanatory.
42917 \begin_layout Standard
42918 In \SpecialChar LyX
42919 one can jump from word to word by pressing
42926 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
42928 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
42929 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
42932 \begin_layout Standard
42935 Sort environments alphabetically
42937 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42940 \begin_layout Standard
42943 Group environments by their category
42945 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42948 \begin_layout Standard
42953 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
42964 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42968 \begin_layout Standard
42969 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
42974 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
42975 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
42979 \begin_layout Subsection
42981 \begin_inset Index idx
42984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42993 \begin_inset Index idx
42996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42999 Settings ! Shortcuts
43007 \begin_layout Standard
43012 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43014 Several binding files are available, among them:
43017 \begin_layout Description
43018 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43021 \begin_layout Description
43022 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43034 \begin_layout Description
43035 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43046 \begin_layout Standard
43047 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43052 , and binding files for special languages.
43053 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43058 \begin_inset space \space{}
43062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43070 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43071 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43072 will try to use the appropriate binding
43076 \begin_layout Standard
43077 Some binding files, like
43081 , only have a limited scope.
43082 When looking at the end of the file
43086 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43089 \begin_layout Standard
43093 \begin_inset space ~
43097 \begin_inset space ~
43102 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43103 in the selected key binding file.
43106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43110 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43115 \begin_inset Index idx
43118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43121 Key Bindings ! Editing
43129 \begin_layout Standard
43130 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43131 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43132 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43133 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43136 Show key-bindings containing
43139 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43140 Insert there for example as keyword
43141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43148 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43149 functions that contain
43150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43158 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43159 All \SpecialChar LyX
43160 functions are also listed in the file
43165 that you will find in the
43172 \begin_layout Standard
43173 For example, to add the shortcut
43181 , select the function and press the
43186 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43187 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43190 \begin_layout Standard
43191 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43192 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43194 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43195 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43197 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43202 \begin_layout Standard
43203 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43206 \begin_layout Standard
43207 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43209 The syntax of the entries is:
43212 \begin_layout Standard
43218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43237 \begin_layout Subsection
43239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43241 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43246 \begin_inset Index idx
43249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43258 \begin_inset Index idx
43261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43264 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43272 \begin_layout Standard
43273 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43274 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43275 provides keyboard maps.
43276 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43277 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43280 \begin_inset space ~
43284 \begin_inset space ~
43289 and select the keyboard map file named
43296 \begin_layout Standard
43305 keyboard map and, if you use the
43309 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43312 arg "keymap-primary"
43318 arg "keymap-secondary"
43321 respectively or toggle between them with
43324 arg "keymap-toggle"
43330 \begin_layout Standard
43331 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43339 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43348 \begin_layout Standard
43349 You can also specify the mouse
43351 Wheel scrolling speed
43354 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43358 \begin_layout Standard
43366 \begin_inset space ~
43370 \begin_inset space ~
43375 you can select a key for zooming.
43376 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43379 \begin_layout Subsection
43383 \begin_layout Standard
43384 Input completion is described in section
43385 \begin_inset space ~
43389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43391 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43398 \begin_layout Section
43400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43407 \begin_inset Index idx
43410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43419 \begin_inset Index idx
43422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43433 \begin_layout Standard
43434 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
43435 are normally determined during
43437 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43440 \begin_layout Description
43442 \begin_inset space ~
43445 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
43446 's working directory.
43447 It is the default when you
43458 \begin_inset space ~
43466 \begin_layout Description
43468 \begin_inset space ~
43471 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43473 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43475 \begin_inset space ~
43479 \begin_inset space ~
43487 \begin_layout Description
43489 \begin_inset space ~
43492 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43498 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43502 \begin_inset Newline newline
43506 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43518 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
43519 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43527 \begin_layout Description
43529 \begin_inset space ~
43533 \begin_inset Index idx
43536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43544 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43545 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43546 \begin_inset space ~
43550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43552 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
43560 will be used to save the backups.
43561 \begin_inset Newline newline
43564 Backup files have the ending
43565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43575 \begin_layout Description
43577 \begin_inset space ~
43580 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43581 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
43583 \begin_inset Newline newline
43590 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43596 You can edit this file with the program
43605 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
43606 in its preferences under
43609 \begin_inset space ~
43615 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43620 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
43622 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43623 in your \SpecialChar LyX
43629 and \SpecialChar LyX
43630 need to be running the same time.
43631 \begin_inset Newline newline
43634 The pipe is also used for the
43639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43645 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
43650 \begin_inset Newline newline
43653 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
43654 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43655 \begin_inset Newline newline
43671 \begin_layout Description
43673 \begin_inset space ~
43676 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43679 \begin_layout Description
43681 \begin_inset space ~
43684 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43685 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43686 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43689 \begin_layout Description
43691 \begin_inset space ~
43694 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43700 You only need to specify it if you are using
43704 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43706 For \SpecialChar LyX
43711 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43715 \begin_layout Description
43717 \begin_inset space ~
43720 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43721 When \SpecialChar LyX
43722 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
43723 to find it on the system.
43724 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
43726 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43735 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43736 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43739 \begin_layout Description
43741 \begin_inset space ~
43744 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43745 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
43746 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
43747 code or in the document
43749 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43751 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43752 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43753 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43754 scanned for the input files.
43755 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43756 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
43758 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43759 compilation may fail for some documents.
43762 \begin_layout Section
43766 \begin_layout Standard
43767 Here you can insert your
43776 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43778 \begin_inset space ~
43782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43784 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43788 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43791 \begin_layout Section
43793 \begin_inset Index idx
43796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43799 Language ! Settings
43805 \begin_inset Index idx
43808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43811 Settings ! Language
43819 \begin_layout Subsection
43821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43823 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43830 \begin_layout Description
43832 \begin_inset space ~
43836 \begin_inset space ~
43839 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
43841 You can find its actual translation status here:
43842 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43844 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43852 \begin_layout Description
43854 \begin_inset space ~
43857 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
43858 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
43859 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43860 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43877 The most widespread language package is
43882 \begin_inset Index idx
43885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43894 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
43896 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43897 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43898 come with the alternative
43904 \begin_inset Index idx
43907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43911 -packages ! polyglossia
43916 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43917 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43923 The available selections are described in section
43924 \begin_inset space ~
43928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43930 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43937 \begin_layout Description
43939 \begin_inset space ~
43942 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43943 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
43944 you can here specify the command to start the package.
43945 An example is the start command
43951 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43953 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
43957 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43973 selectlanguage{$$lang}
43978 \begin_layout Description
43980 \begin_inset space ~
43988 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
43989 command toggles the package on and off.
43992 \begin_layout Description
43994 \begin_inset space ~
43998 \begin_inset space ~
44001 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44005 \begin_layout Description
44007 \begin_inset space ~
44011 \begin_inset space ~
44014 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44018 \begin_layout Description
44020 \begin_inset space ~
44024 \begin_inset space ~
44027 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44028 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44029 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44031 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44038 \begin_layout Description
44040 \begin_inset space ~
44043 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44045 When this option is not set, the
44048 \begin_inset space ~
44053 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44055 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44058 \begin_inset space ~
44066 \begin_layout Description
44068 \begin_inset space ~
44074 \begin_inset space ~
44080 When it is not set, the
44083 \begin_inset space ~
44088 is set to the end of the document.
44091 \begin_layout Description
44093 \begin_inset space ~
44097 \begin_inset space ~
44100 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44101 language will be underlined in blue.
44104 \begin_layout Description
44106 \begin_inset space ~
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44113 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44114 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44117 \begin_layout Description
44119 \begin_inset space ~
44122 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44123 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44124 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44125 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44128 \begin_layout Subsection
44132 \begin_layout Standard
44133 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44134 \begin_inset space ~
44138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44140 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44147 \begin_layout Section
44151 \begin_layout Subsection
44155 \begin_layout Description
44157 \begin_inset space ~
44161 \begin_inset space ~
44164 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44167 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44168 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44170 \begin_inset space ~
44176 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44179 \begin_layout Description
44181 \begin_inset space ~
44185 \begin_inset Index idx
44188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44197 \begin_inset Index idx
44200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44203 Settings ! Date format
44208 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44209 \begin_inset Newline newline
44213 \begin_inset Flex URL
44216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44218 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44224 \begin_inset Newline newline
44227 For example the format
44228 \begin_inset Newline newline
44232 \begin_inset Newline newline
44235 prints the date as day/month/year.
44238 \begin_layout Description
44240 \begin_inset space ~
44244 \begin_inset space ~
44247 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44248 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44251 \begin_layout Description
44253 \begin_inset space ~
44256 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44258 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44260 \begin_inset space ~
44266 For a detailed description see section
44268 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44273 \begin_inset space ~
44281 \begin_layout Subsection
44283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44285 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44290 \begin_inset Index idx
44293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44296 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44305 \begin_layout Description
44307 \begin_inset space ~
44311 \begin_inset space ~
44315 \begin_inset space ~
44318 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44323 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44344 are used for Cyrillic.
44345 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44358 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44360 sets up in the background.
44361 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44364 \begin_layout Description
44366 \begin_inset space ~
44370 \begin_inset space ~
44373 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44378 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44382 \begin_layout Description
44384 \begin_inset space ~
44388 \begin_inset space ~
44392 \begin_inset space ~
44396 \begin_inset space ~
44399 options They only have an effect when the program
44403 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44406 \begin_layout Standard
44407 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44408 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44409 manuals of the applications.
44412 \begin_layout Description
44414 \begin_inset space ~
44417 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44418 \begin_inset space ~
44422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44424 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
44431 \begin_layout Description
44433 \begin_inset space ~
44436 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44437 \begin_inset space ~
44441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44443 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
44450 \begin_layout Description
44452 \begin_inset space ~
44455 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44456 \begin_inset space ~
44460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44462 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
44469 \begin_layout Description
44471 \begin_inset space ~
44474 command Command for the program
44476 Check\SpecialChar TeX
44479 that is described in the section
44481 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
44486 Additional Features
44491 \begin_layout Standard
44492 There are additionally the following options:
44495 \begin_layout Description
44497 \begin_inset space ~
44501 \begin_inset space ~
44505 \begin_inset space ~
44509 \begin_inset space ~
44514 \begin_inset space ~
44517 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44535 to separate folders.
44536 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
44538 \begin_inset Index idx
44541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44550 \begin_inset Index idx
44553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44564 \begin_layout Description
44566 \begin_inset space ~
44570 \begin_inset space ~
44574 \begin_inset space ~
44578 \begin_inset space ~
44582 \begin_inset space ~
44586 \begin_inset space ~
44589 changes Removes all manually set
44595 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44596 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44598 \begin_inset space ~
44603 dialog when changing the document class.
44606 \begin_layout Section
44608 \begin_inset space ~
44612 \begin_inset Index idx
44615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44626 \begin_layout Subsection
44628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44630 name "subsec:Converters"
44635 \begin_inset Index idx
44638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44649 \begin_layout Standard
44650 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44651 from one format to another.
44652 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44653 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44660 \begin_inset space ~
44665 field and press the
44670 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44674 \begin_inset space ~
44679 drop-down list, modify the
44683 field and press the
44690 \begin_layout Standard
44693 Converter File Cache
44699 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44701 Maximum Age (in days
44704 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44705 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44708 \begin_layout Standard
44709 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44710 definition, is described in the section
44721 \begin_layout Subsection
44723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44725 name "sec:File-Formats"
44730 \begin_inset Index idx
44733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44742 \begin_inset Index idx
44745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44756 \begin_layout Standard
44757 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
44767 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44770 \begin_layout Standard
44771 You can also define the
44773 Default output format
44775 that is used when you use
44777 View, Update, View Master Document
44781 Update Master Document
44787 menu or the toolbar.
44790 \begin_layout Standard
44791 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44802 \begin_layout Standard
44803 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
44805 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44806 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44807 This is done by specifying a
44812 More about this is described in the section
44823 \begin_layout Chapter
44824 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
44826 \begin_inset Index idx
44829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44840 name "chap:Units-available-in"
44847 \begin_layout Standard
44849 \begin_inset space ~
44853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44855 reference "tab:Units"
44859 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
44860 and used in this documentation.
44863 \begin_layout Standard
44864 \begin_inset Float table
44870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44871 \begin_inset Caption Standard
44873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44891 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44899 \begin_inset Tabular
44900 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
44901 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
44902 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44903 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44904 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45041 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45110 scaled point (65536
45111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45189 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45262 % of original image width
45267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45578 \begin_layout Chapter
45580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45582 name "chap:Credits"
45589 \begin_layout Standard
45590 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45591 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45594 \begin_layout Itemize
45597 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45600 \begin_layout Itemize
45606 \begin_layout Itemize
45612 \begin_layout Itemize
45618 \begin_layout Itemize
45624 \begin_layout Itemize
45630 \begin_layout Itemize
45636 \begin_layout Itemize
45642 \begin_layout Itemize
45645 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45648 \begin_layout Itemize
45654 \begin_layout Itemize
45660 \begin_layout Itemize
45666 \begin_layout Itemize
45672 \begin_layout Itemize
45678 \begin_layout Itemize
45684 \begin_layout Itemize
45690 \begin_layout Itemize
45696 \begin_layout Itemize
45697 The \SpecialChar LyX
45699 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45709 \begin_layout Standard
45710 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45713 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45720 \begin_layout Bibliography
45721 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45722 LatexCommand bibitem
45729 The \SpecialChar LyX
45731 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45734 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45740 \begin_inset Newline newline
45744 \begin_inset Flex URL
45747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45749 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
45757 \begin_layout Bibliography
45758 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45759 LatexCommand bibitem
45760 key "latexcompanion"
45765 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45767 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
45768 Companion Second Edition.
45771 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45774 \begin_layout Bibliography
45775 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45776 LatexCommand bibitem
45782 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45785 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45789 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45792 \begin_layout Bibliography
45793 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45794 LatexCommand bibitem
45803 : A Document Preparation System.
45806 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45809 \begin_layout Bibliography
45810 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45811 LatexCommand bibitem
45821 The \SpecialChar TeX
45825 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45828 \begin_layout Bibliography
45829 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45830 LatexCommand bibitem
45836 The \SpecialChar TeX
45838 \begin_inset Newline newline
45842 \begin_inset Flex URL
45845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45847 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45855 \begin_layout Bibliography
45856 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45857 LatexCommand bibitem
45863 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
45865 \begin_inset Newline newline
45869 \begin_inset Flex URL
45872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45874 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
45882 \begin_layout Bibliography
45883 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45884 LatexCommand bibitem
45891 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45893 name "Documentation"
45894 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45901 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45905 \begin_inset Newline newline
45909 \begin_inset Flex URL
45912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45914 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45922 \begin_layout Bibliography
45923 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45924 LatexCommand bibitem
45931 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45933 name "Documentation"
45934 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45939 how to use the program
45941 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45945 \begin_inset Newline newline
45949 \begin_inset Flex URL
45952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45954 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45962 \begin_layout Bibliography
45963 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45964 LatexCommand bibitem
45971 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45973 name "Documentation"
45974 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45984 \begin_inset Newline newline
45988 \begin_inset Flex URL
45991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45993 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46001 \begin_layout Bibliography
46002 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46003 LatexCommand bibitem
46004 key "makeindex-man"
46010 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46013 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46023 \begin_inset Newline newline
46027 \begin_inset Flex URL
46030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46032 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46040 \begin_layout Bibliography
46041 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46042 LatexCommand bibitem
46049 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46051 name "Documentation"
46052 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46062 \begin_inset Newline newline
46066 \begin_inset Flex URL
46069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46071 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46079 \begin_layout Bibliography
46080 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46081 LatexCommand bibitem
46088 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46090 name "Documentation"
46091 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46096 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46098 \begin_inset Newline newline
46102 \begin_inset Flex URL
46105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46107 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46115 \begin_layout Bibliography
46116 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46117 LatexCommand bibitem
46124 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46126 name "Documentation"
46127 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46132 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46138 \begin_inset Index idx
46141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46145 -packages ! caption
46151 \begin_inset Newline newline
46155 \begin_inset Flex URL
46158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46160 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46168 \begin_layout Bibliography
46169 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46170 LatexCommand bibitem
46177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46179 name "Documentation"
46180 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46185 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46191 \begin_inset Index idx
46194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46198 -packages ! enumitem
46204 \begin_inset Newline newline
46208 \begin_inset Flex URL
46211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46213 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46221 \begin_layout Bibliography
46222 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46223 LatexCommand bibitem
46230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46232 name "Documentation"
46233 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46238 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46244 \begin_inset Index idx
46247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46251 -packages ! fancyhdr
46257 \begin_inset Newline newline
46261 \begin_inset Flex URL
46264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46266 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46274 \begin_layout Bibliography
46275 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46276 LatexCommand bibitem
46283 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46285 name "Documentation"
46286 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
46291 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46297 \begin_inset Index idx
46300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46304 -packages ! hyperref
46310 \begin_inset Newline newline
46314 \begin_inset Flex URL
46317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46319 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
46327 \begin_layout Bibliography
46328 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46329 LatexCommand bibitem
46336 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46338 name "Documentation"
46339 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46344 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46350 \begin_inset Index idx
46353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46357 -packages ! nomencl
46363 \begin_inset Newline newline
46367 \begin_inset Flex URL
46370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46372 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46380 \begin_layout Bibliography
46381 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46382 LatexCommand bibitem
46389 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46391 name "Documentation"
46392 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46397 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46403 \begin_inset Index idx
46406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46410 -packages ! prettyref
46416 \begin_inset Newline newline
46420 \begin_inset Flex URL
46423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46425 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46433 \begin_layout Bibliography
46434 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46435 LatexCommand bibitem
46442 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46444 name "Documentation"
46445 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46450 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46456 \begin_inset Index idx
46459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46463 -packages ! refstyle
46469 \begin_inset Newline newline
46473 \begin_inset Flex URL
46476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46478 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46486 \begin_layout Bibliography
46487 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46488 LatexCommand bibitem
46495 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46498 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46503 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46505 \begin_inset Newline newline
46509 \begin_inset Flex URL
46512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46514 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46522 \begin_layout Bibliography
46523 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46524 LatexCommand bibitem
46531 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46534 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46539 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46541 \begin_inset Newline newline
46545 \begin_inset Flex URL
46548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46550 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46558 \begin_layout Bibliography
46559 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46560 LatexCommand bibitem
46567 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46570 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46575 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46576 for Cyrillic languages:
46577 \begin_inset Newline newline
46581 \begin_inset Flex URL
46584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46586 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46594 \begin_layout Bibliography
46595 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46596 LatexCommand bibitem
46603 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46606 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46611 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46613 \begin_inset Newline newline
46617 \begin_inset Flex URL
46620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46622 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46630 \begin_layout Bibliography
46631 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46632 LatexCommand bibitem
46639 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46642 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46647 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46649 \begin_inset Newline newline
46653 \begin_inset Flex URL
46656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46658 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46666 \begin_layout Bibliography
46667 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46668 LatexCommand bibitem
46675 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46678 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46683 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46685 \begin_inset Newline newline
46689 \begin_inset Flex URL
46692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46694 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46702 \begin_layout Bibliography
46703 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46704 LatexCommand bibitem
46711 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46714 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46719 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46721 \begin_inset Newline newline
46725 \begin_inset Flex URL
46728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46730 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46738 \begin_layout Bibliography
46739 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46740 LatexCommand bibitem
46747 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46750 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46755 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46757 \begin_inset Newline newline
46761 \begin_inset Flex URL
46764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46766 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46774 \begin_layout Bibliography
46775 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46776 LatexCommand bibitem
46783 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46786 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46791 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46793 \begin_inset Newline newline
46797 \begin_inset Flex URL
46800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46802 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46810 \begin_layout Bibliography
46811 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46812 LatexCommand bibitem
46819 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46822 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46827 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46829 \begin_inset Newline newline
46833 \begin_inset Flex URL
46836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46838 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46846 \begin_layout Bibliography
46847 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46848 LatexCommand bibitem
46855 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46858 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46863 about new features in
46869 \begin_inset Newline newline
46873 \begin_inset Flex URL
46876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46878 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46886 \begin_layout Standard
46887 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46921 \begin_inset Note Note
46924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46933 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46934 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46935 bibliography is the second one:
46943 \begin_layout Standard
46944 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46945 LatexCommand bibtex
46946 bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs"
46947 options "../biblio/alphadin"
46954 \begin_layout Standard
46955 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46959 \begin_layout Standard
46960 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46961 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46967 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46968 LatexCommand printindex